Chrysler Automobile 11WK741 126 AB User Manual

2 0 1 1

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

Grand Cherokee

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and

the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution

therefore.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking

driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes

in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or

improvements to its products without imposing any

obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-

ously manufactured.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your

perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,

and your judgment is impaired when you have been

drinking. Never drink and then drive.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Ⅵ Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will

LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision improve with experience. When driving off-road or working

workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle

essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe

federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive.

This is a specialized utility vehicle, it can go places and

perform tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive

enclosed vehicles were not intended. It handles and

maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both

on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar

with your vehicle.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a

collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,

located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented

documents. Please take the time to read these publica-

tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-

mendations in this manual will help assure safe and

enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for

on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving

or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel

drive vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s

Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,

particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result

be aware of all safety warnings.

in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal

injury. Drive carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher

ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in

a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an

unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because

of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of

control it may roll over when some other vehicles may

not.

Rollover Warning Label

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

the U.S. government notes that the universal use of contains the information you desire.

existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment

unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-

erating procedures that could result in a collision or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire manual, you may miss important

information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a

label located on the left front corner of the instrument

panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the

windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile

Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on

your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of

your vehicle identification number and optional equip-

ment.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Ⅵ Sentry Key௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Remote Open Window Feature —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Ⅵ Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 50

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 53

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 54

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 55

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 28

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Ⅵ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —

▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 72

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 92

Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 57

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

▫ Seatbelt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 63

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outsidethe Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an

consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of

transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented

integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START

the ignition switch with either side up.

position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.

When released from the START position, the switch

automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature

This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go

feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the Elec-

Operating” for further information.

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the

ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Key Fob

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the

square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located

on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-

tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the

rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on

the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the

RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for

locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key

with you when valet parking.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with

the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.

Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)

into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.

1 — LOCK

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

4 — START

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition

at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the

then pull the key out with your other hand.

OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.

With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will

display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

NOTE:

•

If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the

shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporar-

ily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key

to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as

described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap

the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this

safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started

and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until

you obtain service.

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

•

The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up

to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

WARNING!

•

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key

Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the ve-

hicle.

•

Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote

Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition

ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The

system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an

invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds

when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition

position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi-

tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three

seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the

bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the

electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after

the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid

Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will

result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the driv-

er’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in

ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the re-

minder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

SENTRY KEYா

The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-

onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as

possible by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some after-market remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting

problems and loss of security protection.

•

Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to

place the ignition in OFF.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is

required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob

is one that has never been programmed.

•

This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,

liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthor-

ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior

switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass

are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both

audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the head-

lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeat-

edly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present

(driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after

three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn

signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer

system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to

the authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15

and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following conditions:

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ- will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the

ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second

Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will

one should go off in the future, you will need to know cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success-

which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it. fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a

slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.

Rearming The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button until the

horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates

after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will that the vehicle ignition is “OFF” (refer to “Starting

rearm itself.

Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information). Then either press the power door LOCK

switch while the driver or passenger door is open, press

the lock button on the front driver or passenger door

To Arm The System

Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless handle with a valid key fob in range, or press the Remote

Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button (refer to

when you use the power door lock switch while the door “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-

is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the ing Your Vehicle” for further information).

Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Disarm The System

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter,

pull on the front driver or passenger door handle (refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information) with a valid

key fob in range, or press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/

Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the

vehicle), or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch

(if the Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the

ON/RUN position.

Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to

press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or

turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If

something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in

your absence, the horn will sound three times when you

unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you

remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE

transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed

(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,

the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK

button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle

Security Alarm. You may also accidentally sound the

Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door

with the key and then opening the door.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The interior lights come on when you open any door or

use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to un-

lock any door. They will remain on for approximately

30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into

after you close all the doors. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle the ignition switch disables the system from responding

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system

strument Panel” for further information.

from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all

RKE transmitters.

NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the

dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme

downward position), unless the overhead map/reading

lights are turned on manually.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to

approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob

with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need

to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

Key Fob with Four-Button RKE Transmitter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock The Doors

Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE

unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To

acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle

system will also turn on.

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles

equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First

Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program-

mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

To Lock The Doors

Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door

ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and

the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and

then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button

until the windows lower to the level desired or until they

lower completely.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

Using The Panic Alarm

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry

feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To

change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold

the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one

second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the

headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse

on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a

second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph

(24 km/h) or greater.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical

ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with

the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps your thumb and then pull the key out with your other

and horn will remain on.

hand.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

•

Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

•

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

Emergency Key Removal

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade

screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of

the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the

seal during removal.

Separating RKE Transmitter

3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the

battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on

the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.

Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin

oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a

battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal

halves together.

distance, check for these two conditions:

General Information

1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

following conditions:

tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-

niently from outside the vehicle while still

maintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 300 ft (91 m).

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-

matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

WARNING!

•

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-

bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious

injury or death when inhaled.

Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

•

Shift lever in PARK

Doors closed

Hood closed

•

Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed

Hazard switch off

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

Ignition key removed from ignition switch

Battery at an acceptable charge level

RKE PANIC button not pressed

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the

vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-

turely:

•

Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

NOTE:

•

If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds.

Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset

The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned

to the ON/RUN position.

For security, power window and power sunroof op-

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is

in the Remote Start mode.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Press and release the REMOTE START button

on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-

onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking

lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if

programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle

will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute

cycle.

•

The engine can be started two consecutive times with

the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be

cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or

the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN

position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a

third cycle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or

allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE:

•

For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go

feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN

position in order to drive the vehicle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system

will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START

button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

•

For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go

feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Insert

Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC until

you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the

doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,

press and release the START/STOP button. If the

START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob

into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the

ON/RUN position.

•

For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go fea-

ture, the message “Push Start Button” will display in

the EVIC until you push the START button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

DOOR LOCKS

When remote start is activated, the heated steering The power door locks can be manually locked or un-

wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock

turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver knob. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,

vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not

remote start is activated. These features will stay on inside the vehicle before closing the door.

through the duration of remote start or until the ignition

switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.

The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and

deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start

Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable

Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel”.

Manual Door Lock Knob

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

WARNING!

•

For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Do not

leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of

vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in-

juries and death.

Power Door Lock Switch

Power Door Locks

If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door

will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside

the vehicle before closing the door.

The power door lock switch is located on each front door

panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in

the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the

doors will not lock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped

the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the

may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.

doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is

stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock

automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph

(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. This feature will reset

whenever a door is opened.

Child-Protection Door Lock System —

Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

To engage or disengage the Child-Protection Door

Lock system

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and

rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged (locked).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the

Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually

raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll

down the window, and open the door using the outside

door handle.

•

If a passive entry door handle has not been used for

72 hours, the passive entry feature for the handle may

time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle

will reactivate the door handle’s passive entry feature.

If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the passive entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to

lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to

press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door

handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will

automatically lock after 60 seconds.

NOTE:

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

•

Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front

door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.

The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the

door is unlocked.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front

passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-

cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when

the door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door

unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle

Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed

all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s

front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob

present in the ignition.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel

switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors

have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and

outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE

transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other

valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside

the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically un-

locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on

the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive

Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

To Enter The Liftgate

Liftgate Passive Entry Button

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of

the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate

below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed

in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button

on the liftgate. If ЉUnlock Driver Door 1st pressЉ is

programmed in EVIC, the liftgate and Flipper glass will

unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For

further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-

grammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel”.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on

the outside of the handle.

Outside Door Handle Lock Button

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door

handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all

four doors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

•

After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you

must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock

the doors, using either passive entry door handle.

•

The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE

transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE

transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the

vehicle’s interior door panel.

WINDOWS

Power Window Switches

Power Windows

The power window switches remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.

Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

The power window controls are located on the driver’s

door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front

passenger door and rear doors which operate the front

passenger and rear passenger door windows. The win-

dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch

is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

The power window switches remain active for 10 min-

utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the

ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Enter-

N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,

particularly unattended children, can become en-

trapped by the windows while operating the power

window switches. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —

Driver And Front Passenger Door Only

Lift the window switch fully upward to the second

detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

Auto-Down

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to

the first detent and release when you want the window to

stop.

Both the driver and front passenger window switches

have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch

past the first detent, release, and the window will go

down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” move-

ment, operate the switch in either the up or down

direction and release the switch.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during

Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.

Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to

close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-

tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly

To open the window part way, press to the first detent

and release it when you want the window to stop.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to Window Lockout Button

the first detent and hold it to close the window manually. The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows

you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To

WARNING!

disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the

Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,

press the Window Lockout button again.

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Resetting The Auto Up Feature

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window

probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for an

additional two seconds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and continue to

hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after

the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize

the buffeting.

LIFTGATE

To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.

Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger

or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.

Liftgate Release

WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-

sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the

liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Liftgate Flipper Glass

Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connec-

The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing

liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass

the window switch located on the liftgate.

is open.

NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should

occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to

open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can

be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the

liftgate trim panel.

WARNING!

Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-

sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your

passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

the flipper glass closed when you are operating the

vehicle.

Liftgate Glass Release

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

To operate the power liftgate manually in the open

The power liftgate may be opened by pulling direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power

up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put

LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry liftgate into manual mode.

(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button

When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is

on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open

pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to

the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the

signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash

button twice within five seconds a second time will close

Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate

the liftgate.

chime will be audible. For further information, refer to

The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by ЉCustomer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/

pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Љ in ЉUnder-

overhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE standing Your Instrument PanelЉ.

button located on left rear trim, near the liftgate opening.

NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the

Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim

liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to

once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be

open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can

used to open the liftgate.

be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the

liftgate trim panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press

the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the

liftgate, and then press it again to close.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo

damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is

clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched

before driving away.

•

If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate

is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open

position.

If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate

is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow

manual operation.

NOTE:

•

If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is

closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically

reverse to the closed or open position, provided it

meets sufficient resistance.

The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the

vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h).

•

There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the

liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips

will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.

The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures

below Ϫ22°F (Ϫ30°C) or temperatures above 150°F

(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice

from the liftgate before pressing any of the power

liftgate switches.

The power liftgate must be in the full open position for

rear liftgate close button or overhead console close

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

•

If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

within the same cycle, the system will automatically However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-

stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu- ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when

ally.

opening the liftgate in cold weather.

If your liftgate is power closing and you put the

vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power

close. However, vehicle movement may result in a

detection of an obstruction.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

•

Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and

all passengers

WARNING!

Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-

ger

•

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-

sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the

liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

Do not use the recirculation mode.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on

top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint)

•

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

for the driver and passengers seated next to a window

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

An energy-absorbing steering column and steering NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage

wheel

inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different

rates of inflation based on the severity and type of

collision.

•

Knee bolsters for front seat occupants

Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance

occupant protection by managing occupant energy

during an impact event

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

•

All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the

seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt

all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the

desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large

item in a seat — if equipped

WARNING!

In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled

up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other

passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are

buckled up properly.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized

seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether

for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold

infant and child restraint systems. For more information

on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen

far away from home or on your own street.

WARNING!

•

Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones of

your body. These are the strongest parts of your

body and can take the forces of an accident the

best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could

make your injuries in an accident much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you could

even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these

instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to

keep your passengers safe, too.

Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.

Some of the worst injuries happen when people are

thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

•

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-

signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.

This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move

freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an

accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you

striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

•

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding

in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.

Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch

plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt

go around your lap.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING!

•

A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing

internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the

buckle nearest you.

•

A belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

Latch Plate to Buckle

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an

accident.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck

injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a

collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during an accident. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

WARNING!

•

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a

collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in

your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer

immediately and have it fixed.

•

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a

bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor

will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident

and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt

system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose

parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they

have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.).

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

Removing Slack from Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow it to retract fully.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a

fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the

latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be

adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away

from your neck. Press the release button to release the

anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position

that fits you best.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,

you will prefer a higher position. When you release the

button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by

pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it

is locked into position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing the release button. To verify the

shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on

the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into

position.

WARNING!

•

The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced

if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-

tion is not working properly when checked ac-

cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in accidents.

•

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions to help

further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on

accident.

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

which are used to secure a child restraint system. For

additional information refer to “Installing Child Re-

straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of

feature for each seating position.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is

designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This

feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on

the occupant’s chest.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —

If Equipped

Driver

N/A

ALR

Center

N/A

ALR

Passenger

ALR

First Row

Second Row

Third Row

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-

locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in

the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-

able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-

tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode

anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating

position that has a belt with this feature. Children

12 years old and under should always be properly

restrained in the rear seat.

ALR

N/A

•

N/A — Not Applicable

ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably

wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not

activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a

ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing

to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull

out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-

ably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the

latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire belt is extracted.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will Seat Belt Pretensioners

hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The seat belts for both front seating positions are

now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to

remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an

accident. These devices improve the performance of the

seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the

occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all

size occupants, including those in child restraints.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

WARNING!

•

The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced

if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-

tion is not working properly when checked ac-

cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly

could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-

ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a

deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-

nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- However if during a front impact, a secondary rear

tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-

in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and ity and type of the impact.

trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require

the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear

impact requires deployment, both the driver and front

passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap

between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.

This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the

extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in

certain types of rear impacts.

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front

3 — Head Restraint Back Half

(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)

4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

2 — Seatback

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may

not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

CAUTION!

All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-

ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head

restraints are placed in their proper positions in order

to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an

accident.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and

positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active

Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle”.

Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)

Hand Positioning Points On AHR

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,

you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and

front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active

Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they

have moved forward (as shown in step three of the

resetting procedure).

2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at

a comfortable position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the

vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock

into the back decorative plastic half.

1 — Downward Movement

2 — Rearward Movement

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlertா)

BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver and

front passenger (if equipped with front passenger

BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seatbelts. This feature is active

whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat

passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will

turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are

fastened. BeltAlert௡ triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle

speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts

for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas-

tened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Re-

minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are

fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants

AHR In Reset Position

NOTE:

•

If you have difficulties or problems resetting the to fasten their seatbelts. If a front seatbelt is unbuckled

Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.

while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),

BeltAlert௡ will chime as a single notification and illumi-

nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to

the 96 second reminder sequence.

•

For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints

checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized

dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the 2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON/RUN position

front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be (do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt

triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front Reminder Light to turn off.

passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if

3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle and

equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in

then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three times

the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are

within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.

secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single

BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorized

chime will sound to signify that you have successfully

dealer or by following these steps:

completed the programming.

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn

60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the

on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re-

ON/RUN or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does

buckling the seat belt.

not recommend deactivating BeltAlert௡.

BeltAlert௡ can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any

position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, the

seatbelt.

Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate

while the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with

belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Seatbelt Lock Out

extender should be used only if the existing belt is not

The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-

will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless tender and store it.

the rear seat upper latch is engaged.

WARNING!

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts

throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can

increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use

when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn

low and snug, and in the recommended seating

positions. Remove and store the extender when not

needed.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt

across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the

abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is an accident.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-

bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and

when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if

equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized

dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator

words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of

inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The

seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Airbags.

Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag

Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,

and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC

airbags, are located above the side windows and their

covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags

2 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal

regulations for Advanced Airbags.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted

Side Airbags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an

occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-

Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of

the front seats.

•

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolster

Driver Advanced Front Airbag

Passenger Advanced Front Airbag

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

Front and Side Impact Sensors

NOTE:

•

Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;

but they will open during airbag deployment.

•

After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Airbag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag

system components:

Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,

and Seat Track Position Sensors

•

Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and

Front Passenger

•

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Airbag Warning Light

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Front Airbag Features

WARNING!

The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver

and front passenger airbags. This system provides output

appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors.

•

No objects should be placed over or near the

airbag on the instrument panel, because any such

objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a

collision severe enough to cause the airbag to

inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers

or attempt to open them manually. You may dam-

age the airbags and you could be injured because

the airbags may no longer be functional. The

protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-

signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in

any way.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output

is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is

used for more severe collisions.

•

Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster

such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,

etc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)

When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide en- front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag

hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys

side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air- the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only

bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out- the right airbag.

board side of the front seats.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC)

SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover

protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in

addition to that provided by the body structure. Each

airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the

head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential

for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-

ward, covering both windows on the impact side.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable

Curtain (SABIC) Location

NOTE:

•

Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;

but they will open during airbag deployment.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

•

Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during

deployment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

WARNING!

•

If your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the location of the SABIC.

The area where the SABIC is located should re-

main free from any obstructions.

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the side airbags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could

be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags,

do not have any accessory items installed which

will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to

your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require

permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-

lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof

of the vehicle for any reason.

Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners, SAB

and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle

may deploy.

The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both

front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy

the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags and SABIC

airbags during impacts that require side airbag occupant

protection.

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-

pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front

Airbags.

Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never

ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger

Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can

cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-

tion.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front

Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved

protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags

also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat

belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be

secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use

child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow

children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under

their arm.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified

seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer

as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. Center. Phone numbers are provided under ЉIf You Need

(Refer to “Child Restraints”)

AssistanceЉ.

You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

WARNING!

•

Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you have

airbags.

All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder

belts properly.

The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Airbags room to inflate.

(Continued)

Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags

will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the

door.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or

side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.

Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic

ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-

bags, SAB airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as

required, depending on the severity and type of impact.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air-

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains

(SABIC) and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side

Airbags (SAB) need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in

certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and

type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-

pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover

collisions.

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other

hand, depending on the type and location of impact,

Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system

required for this vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the

little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.

initial deceleration.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or

airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

of collision.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over

time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not

good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have

deployed.

Light in the instrument panel for approxi-

mately four to eight seconds for a self-check

when the ignition is first turned on. After the

self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the

ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it

turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily

or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light

comes on again after initial startup.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-

dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-

ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is

noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics

also record the nature of the malfunction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

based on the collision type and severity. The steering

wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the

instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the

airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in

about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time

it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly

deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front

passenger.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to

protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes

on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the

airbag system immediately.

The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the

vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the

airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag

Inflator Units

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag (SAB)

Inflator Units

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are de-

signed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla-

tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel

and the right side of the instrument panel. When the

ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front

Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of

non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front

Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible,

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side

airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of

collision.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of

triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The

inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-

space between the occupant and the door. The side quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with

airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side enough force to injure you if you are not belted and

airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area

force, that it could injure you if you are not seated where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to

properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick

side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.

when it is inflated.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC) Inflator Units

Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,

vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of

During collisions where the impact is confined to a whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners, SAB and/or

deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and

SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the

SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Front And Side Impact Sensors

•

Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or until the ignition key is

removed.

In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors

can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response

to certain impact events.

Unlock the doors automatically.

Enhanced Accident Response System

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Airbags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if

the communication network remains intact, and the

power remains intact, depending on the nature of the

event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all

Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

ing functions:

the airbag system.

•

Cut off fuel to the engine.

Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the ignition key is turned off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any

or all of the following may occur:

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

•

The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-

sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front

passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-

abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium airbags will not be in place to protect you.

floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

WARNING!

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor

immediately.

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-

tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-

mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-

troller (ORC) system serviced as well.

•

As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for

airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate

the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag

system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

airbag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the airbag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

WARNING!

•

Modifications to any part of the airbag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the airbag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,

or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Airbag Warning Light

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

You will want to have the airbags ready to related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

inflate for your protection in a collision. The Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may

Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check

circuits and interconnecting wiring associated the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located

with airbag system electrical components. While the on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag

airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer ser-

vice the airbag system immediately.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

•

The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

first turned to the ON/RUN position.

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

•

The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

remains on while driving. is designed to record such data as:

•

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

were buckled/fastened;

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the

time, including babies and children. Every state in the

United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that

small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the

law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce- Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

crash investigation.

the rear seats rather than in the front.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

There are different sizes and types of restraints for Infants And Child Restraints

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat

for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your

child.

•

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least

one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant

carriers and convertible child seats.

WARNING!

•

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the

vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up

to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often

have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rearward-facing by children who weigh more than

20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types

of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the

lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an-

chorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat An-

chorage System.)

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,

can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force

required to hold even an infant on your lap can

become so great that you could not hold the child, no

matter how strong you are. The child and others

could be badly injured. Any child riding in your

vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s

size.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child

restraint:

WARNING!

•

Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in

the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger

airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag

deployment could cause severe injury or death to

infants in this position.

Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-

actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be

used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant re-

straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-

ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or

fatal injury to the infant.

•

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that

you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you

will use it before you buy it.

•

The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s

weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for

weight and height limits.

Carefully follow the instructions that come with the

restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may

not work when you need it.

The second row seating positions are equipped with

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR). To install child

restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until

there is enough allowance to pass it through the child

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, NOTE: For additional information, refer to

pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-

retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor, dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-

pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/

portion around the child restraint. For additional roadsafety/ safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

information refer to ЉAutomatic Locking Retractors

ModeЉ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are

owners’ manual.

Older Children and Child Restraints

older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the

•

Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

manufacturer’s instructions tell you.

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children

who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older

than one year. These child seats are also held in the

vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child

restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child

Seat Anchorage System.)

WARNING!

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the

vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a

sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants

or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing

more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit

the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the

child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-

positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the

lap/shoulder belt.

•

If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a

child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind

the back.

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)

Children Too Large for Booster Seats

Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend system provides for the installation of the child restraint

over the front of the seat when their back is against the without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing

seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper

tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle

•

Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

structure.

The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

as possible.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-

able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be

•

Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems

slouching can move the belt out of position.

having attachments for those anchorages will continue to

also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat

belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

connection to the top tether anchorages, have been anchors can be readily identified by the symbol located on

available for some time. For some older child restraints, the seatback directly above the anchorages and are just

many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child

strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger

of all the available attachments provided with your child along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion

restraint in any vehicle.

surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt must be used for the

center position. Regardless of the specific type of lower

attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats

such that two seats share a common lower anchorage.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to

install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts

not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out

of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints

that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the

with, and never leave your child unattended in the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard

vehicle.

position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the

center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-

compatible, you can only install the child restraints using

the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruc-

tions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint System”.

The rear outboard seating positions have lower

anchorages capable of accommodating LATCH-

compatible child seats having flexible,

webbing-mounted lower attachments and child

seats with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all

child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that

were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at

the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,

and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to

install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you

run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and

seat cushion surfaces.

Latch Anchorages

In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind

each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear

seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat

back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel

To Access Top Tether Strap

Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)

WARNING!

Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load

floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a

failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor

connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a behind the seat. Finally, tighten all three straps as you

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- push the child restraint rearward and downward into the

facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child

restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a

WARNING!

means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

First, loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and

on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the

hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach

the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchor-

age bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then,

locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where

you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether

strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether

strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor

and the child restraint. There are three top tether anchor-

ages located on the back of the seat, behind the gap panel.

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or

child restraint. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belts

The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-

ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR),

which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in

locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest

pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located

belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat

keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will backing.

loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull

it tight if necessary.

For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is

enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint

and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the

belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the

belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess

webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child

restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether

For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat

position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on

backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook the back of the seat. To access the top tether strap

to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.

anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor

panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top

tether strap anchorages.

Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached

For center seating position route the tether strap over the

seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether

anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard

seating positions, route the tether under the head rests,

Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel

To Access Top Tether Strap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)

Top Tether Strap Mounting

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchor-

ages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.

Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the

floor behind the seats.

WARNING!

•

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchor positions directly be-

hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load

floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a

failure of an infant or child restraint. The child

could be badly injured or killed.

Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in

pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Top Tether Strap Attachment

For the center seating position route the tether strap over

the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top

tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind

the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route

the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook

to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS

limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL

OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

WARNING!

•

Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-

preted as an indication of difficulty.

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed and the climate

control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT

use the recirculation mode.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)

follow these safety tips:

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or

out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force

outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is

inoperable.

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt

or retractor condition, replace the belt.

Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of

your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal

area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that

they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the

pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other

ways.

Airbag Warning Light

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your

authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes

on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-

rized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-

ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning.

Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.

Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

If required, mounting posts must be properly

installed, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss

of control of the vehicle.

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

•

Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

•

Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and inter-

fering with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

•

Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on

top of already installed floor mats. Additional

floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size

of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

OutsideThe Vehicle

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or

cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be

Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

located and corrected immediately.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights

while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high

beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . 110

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 107 Ⅵ Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 119

Ⅵ Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Ⅵ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 138

▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 124

▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback

Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 130 Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 145

▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 145

▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 147

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID

Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 153

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 156

Ⅵ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Ⅵ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Ⅵ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . 160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 174

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 177

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 178

▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 182

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Ⅵ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 167

▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 168

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

Ⅵ Parksense௡ Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 192

▫ Parksense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Parksense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Parksense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Enabling And Disabling Park Sense௡ . . . . . . 197

▫ Turning Parkview௡ On Or Off — Without

Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 206

▫ Programming HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 210

▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

▫ Service The Parksense௡ Rear Park Assist

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Cleaning The Parksense௡ System . . . . . . . . . 199

▫ Parksense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 199

Ⅵ Parkview௡ Rear Back Up Camera —

▫ Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink௡ Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Turning Parkview௡ On Or Off —

With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . 203

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫ Closing Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

▫ Opening Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . 217

▫ Closing Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . . 217

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Sunroof And Power Shade Movement –

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Pinch Protect Override Cancellation . . . . . . . 218

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Ⅵ Command View Sunroof With Power Shade —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Opening Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Ⅵ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Ⅵ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Ⅵ Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is

a twist on mirror that has a fixed position. The mirror

head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various

drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the

view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced

by moving the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward

the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or

off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim-

ming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the

windshield button counterclockwise and requires no

tools for mounting.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have

overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and

normal.

WARNING!

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —

If Equipped

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than

they really are. Relying too much on your passenger

side convex mirror could cause you to collide with

another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mir-

ror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen

in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles

will not have a convex passenger side mirror.

The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automati-

cally adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This

feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming

mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button

at the base of the inside mirror. The mirrors will auto-

matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside

mirror adjusts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Outside Power Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side

door trim panel.

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-

tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a

mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that

you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press

on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want

the mirror to move.

Power Mirror Switch

1 — Mirror Direction Control

2 — Mirror Selection

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver

Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear

window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in

“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further

information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of

the visors.

Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on

automatically.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped

This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for

increased coverage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors

based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to to let the driver know that the system is operational. The

detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any

motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode

rear/front/side of the vehicle.

when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone

starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-

proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM

system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the

vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the

driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

•

The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about

rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the

detection zones.

Rear Detection Zones

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if

your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually

verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle

and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer

or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends

beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the

BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire

time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are

located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road

contamination so that the BSM system can function

properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where

the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-

per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the The BSM system can also be configured to sound an

detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light audible (chime) alert and reduces the radio volume to

located in the outside mirrors.

notify the driver of objects that have entered the detec-

tion zones. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further

information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to

see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an

alert during these types of zone entries.

Warning Light Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Entering From The Side

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either

side of the vehicle.

side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative

speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed

less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in

the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning

light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed

between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Passing

Overtaking/Approaching

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are

stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in

berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.

on such objects. This is normal operation and your

vehicle does not require service.

Opposing Traffic

Stationary Objects

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to

help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM

system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-

clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with the BSM system, always check your vehicles

mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn

signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path

RCP Detection Zones

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the

driver when backing out of parking spaces where their

vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed

slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the

rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will

then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an

oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of

the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of

the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to

2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-

mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in

parking lot situations.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation

be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

system will not be able to alert the driver.

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

driver is alerted using both the visual and audible

alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

Blind Spot Alert

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM

system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side

view mirror based on a detected object. However, when

the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond

with both visual and audible alerts when a detected

object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,

the radio volume is reduced.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be

used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a

parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when

backing up, even when using RCP. Always check

carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and

be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-

ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

death.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the

BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate

side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert Blind Spot Alert Off

present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will When the BSM system is turned off there will be no

also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP

object are present on the same side at the same time, both systems.

the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating

the audible alert the radio volume (if on) will also be

mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle

reduced.

is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and

NOTE:

used.

•

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM

system, the radio volume is reduced.

Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you

to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in

your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone button

on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped)

and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone.

•

If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request

the appropriate visual alert only.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond

with both visual and audible alerts when a detected

object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-

quested, the radio volume is also reduced. Turn/

hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always

requests the chime.

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR

WARNING!

button

controls (if equipped).

located on the radio or steering wheel

•

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

SEATS

Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power

driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches

are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two

switches that control the movement of the seat cushion

and the seatback.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when you have reached the desired position.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,

the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when you have reached the desired position.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

Power Seat Switches

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or

down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of

the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in

the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you

have reached the desired position.

1 — Seatback Switch

2 — Seat Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Reclining The Seatback

WARNING! (Continued)

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or

backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rear-

ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.

Release the switch when you have reached the desired

position.

•

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

•

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fastening the

seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seatbelt.

Do not place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to

the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Passenger’s Power Seat

Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-

senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the

outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control

the movement of the seat and seat cushion.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

WARNING!

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when you have reached the desired position.

•

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fastening the

seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seatbelt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

•

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when you have reached the desired position.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or

down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of

the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in

the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you

have reached the desired position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to

the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats

are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar

switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.

Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.

Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup-

port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will

raise and lower the position of the support.

Power Lumbar Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

Adjustment

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under

the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.

Some models may be equipped with manual front driver Release the bar once you have reached the desired

or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and

rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters

cushion, near the floor.

have latched.

WARNING!

•

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fastening the

seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seatbelt.

Adjustment Bar

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —

Recline

WARNING!

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired

position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift

the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —

If Equipped

To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the

recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to

the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into

place.

Recline Lever

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

WARNING!

•

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-

haustion or other physical condition must exercise

care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

•

Do not place anything on the seat that insulates

against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a

seat that has been overheated could cause serious

burns due to the increased surface temperature of

the seat.

Fold-Flat Passenger Seat

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may be

equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and

seatbacks.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for

HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

CAUTION!

Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the

heating element and/or degrade the material of the seat.

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level

heating. Press the switch a second time to select

LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third

time to shut the heating elements OFF.

Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on

during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System —

If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will

provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the

normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,

the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a

maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation. At that

time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two

to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will

turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 55 minutes.

Front Heated Seats

There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver

and passenger to operate the seats independently. The

controls for each heater are located near the bottom center

of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.

Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Rear Heated Seats

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.

On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of

with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for

allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen- HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

dently. The heated seat switches for each heater are

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level

located on the rear of the center console.

heating. Press the switch a second time to select

LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third

time to shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will

provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the

normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,

the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a

maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that

time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two

Rear Heated Seat Switches

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will

turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

The ventilated seat switches are used

to control the speed of the fans located

in the seat. Press the switch once to

choose HIGH, press it a second time to

choose LOW. Pressing the switch a

third time will turn the ventilated seat

OFF. When HIGH speed is selected

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are

ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are

small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart-

ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat

cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler

in higher ambient temperatures.

both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW

speed is selected one light will be illuminated.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated

seats to operate.

There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the

driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.

The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start

bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just On models that are equipped with remote start, the

below the climate controls.

driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on

during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System —

If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

Head Restraints

Active Head Restraints — Front Seats

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear- nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split

in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and

WARNING!

trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half

of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap

between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.

This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the

extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in

certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-

straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted

or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted

restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to

button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the

downward on the head restraint.

head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head

restraint to move the head restraint away from your

head.

Push Button

Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

•

In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-

straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active

Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

•

Do not place items over the top of the Active Head

Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable

DVD players. These items may interfere with the

operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event

of a collision and could result in serious injury or

death.

Active Head Restraint (Tilted)

(Continued)

NOTE:

•

The head restraints should only be removed by quali-

fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of

the head restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift

upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push down-

ward on the head restraint to lower it.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they

are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose

cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-

tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-

cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head

Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow

this warning could cause personal injury if the

Active Head Restraint is deployed.

Head Restraints — Rear Seats

The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-

able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat

is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their

normal position when the rear seat is raised. After

returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head

restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests

are not removable.

Rear Head Restraint

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.

WARNING!

Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered

position could result in serious injury or death in a

collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-

straints are in their upright positions when the seat is

to be occupied.

NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to

“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

60/40 Split Rear Seat

To Lower Rear Seat

Rear Seat Release

NOTE:

Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for

extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating

room.

•

Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left

outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and

positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to

fold down easily.

•

Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right

outboard seat belt buckled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.

WARNING!

•

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper

stability for child seats and/or passengers. An

improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down

position) should not be used as a play area by

children when the vehicle is in motion. They could

be seriously injured in a collision. Children

should be seated and using the proper restraint

system.

Rear Seat Folded

To Raise Rear Seat

Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interfer-

ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully

locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its

proper position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Reclining Rear Seat

WARNING!

To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever

at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the

lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Seat Release

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the

driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,

driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel posi-

tion (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.

Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also

be programmed to recall the same positions when the

UNLOCK button is pressed.

Driver Memory Buttons

Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One

or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory

position. The memory system can accommodate up to

four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the

two memory positions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote

Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory

5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up

to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).

NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and

button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.

for that button and store a new one.

7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the

1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.

the ON position.

8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY

2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be

you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a

number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.

system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system

9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE

to complete the memory recall before continuing to

transmitters.

Step 3.

10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview

the ON position.

mirror to the desired positions.

11. Select ЉRemote Linked to MemoryЉ in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ЉYesЉ. Refer

4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping

position (if equipped) to the desired positions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To recall the memory setting for driver two, press

Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to

memory position 2.

12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory

position, using the other numbered memory button, or to A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the

link another RKE transmitter to memory.

MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,

1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,

driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory one second will occur before another recall can be

positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not selected.

in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic

To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press

remove the key.

MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to 2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The

memory position 1.

system will recall any memory settings stored in position

1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall

before continuing to Step 3.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat

on the driver’s door.

This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning

which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the

vehicle.

4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY

button 1 on the driver’s door.

There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments

available:

5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK

button on the RKE transmitter.

•

The seat cushion will move rearward approximately

2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is

greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the

rear seat stop when the key is removed from the

ignition switch. The seat will then move forward

approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed

into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.

To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either

memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE

transmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked

to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

•

The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in

(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position

is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the

rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition

switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward To open the hood, two latches must be released.

the ACC/ON position.

1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument

The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- panel and in front of the driver’s door.

abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in

(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there

is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy

Exit/Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry/Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when

the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/

Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the

programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

Hood Release

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left

and lift the hood.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of

the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

Safety Latch Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTS

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight

switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is

on the parking lights, taillights, license plate

light and instrument panel lights are also

turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight

switch back to the O (Off) position.

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-

light switch controls the operation of the headlights,

parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and

fog lights (if equipped).

NOTE:

•

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and

fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less

susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic

is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ-

ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

•

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses

and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry

cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap

solution followed by rinsing.

Headlight Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Headlights On Automatically With Wipers

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it

also has this customer-programmable feature. When

your headlights are in the automatic mode and the

engine is running, they will automatically turn on when

the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable

Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,

steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the

lenses.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.

If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper

System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati-

cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles

within approximately one minute, and they will turn off

approximately four minutes after the wipers completely

stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this

section for further information.

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is

also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to

90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the

headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: When your headlights come on during the To Activate

daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically

dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in

this section for further information.

1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

SmartBeam™ — If Equipped

The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward

lighting at night by automating high beam control

through the use of a digital camera mounted on the

2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight

position.

inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward

cific light and automatically switches from high beams to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to

ensure proper performance. See your local authorized

To Deactivate

dealer.

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward

in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal opera-

tion of low beams).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights

reactivate the system.

Only

This feature prevents the headlights from interfering

with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling

automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in

reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.

NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and

taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause

headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).

Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,

etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the Headlight Delay

system to function improperly.

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a

headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for

approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when

the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is

on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight

delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight

switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on

whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is

not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until

the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the

parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be

used for normal nighttime driving.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles

equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Parking Lights and Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel

lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To

turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch

back to the O (Off) position.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

Fog Light Operation

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight

switch to the parking light or headlight position and

pushing in the headlight rotary control.

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights

are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.

An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will

illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will

turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when

the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the

high beam is selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Interior Lights

to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when

doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.

wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated

to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when

the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the

interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the

way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior

lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode

because it allows the doors to stay open for extended

periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be

regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or

down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can

supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-

Dimmer Control

eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-on Reminder

NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on ON.

after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when

Front Map/Reading Lights

the driver’s door is opened.

The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-

head console.

Battery Saver

To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding

is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for

10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way

up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior

lights will automatically turn off.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled

OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after

eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on

for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior

lights will automatically turn off.

Front Map/Reading Lights

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Ambient Light

side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light

time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-

second time. The lights will also turn on when the ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.

UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is

pressed.

Ambient Light

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Multifunction Lever

Turn Signals

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

steering column.

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or

there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

Flash-To-Pass

Multifunction Lever

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-

ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to

turn on until the lever is released.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument

panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the

multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn

the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on

the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are

operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the

lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to

“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features

of Your Vehicle”.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Operation

CAUTION!

Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent

positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low

wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper

operation.

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is

turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when

weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a

variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving

speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be

regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds

between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second

(fourth detent).

Windshield Wiper Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward

the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the

lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the

wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles

after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the

intermittent interval previously selected.

Intermittent Wiper Operation

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph

(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washer Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in

the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe

cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Mist Control

Mist

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make

occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end

of the lever downward to the Mist position and release

for a single wiping cycle.

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings

to activate this feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-

tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.

Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less

wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver

desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the

OFF position when not using the system.

Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the

wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the

following conditions:

•

Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is

first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-

perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

NOTE:

•

The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.

•

Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the

ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-

TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is

moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

A customer programmable feature in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering

located below the steering wheel at the end of the wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the

steering column.

steering column in position, push the lever upward until

fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the

steering column is locked before driving your ve-

hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury or death.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING

COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as

desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or desired.

shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

steering column lever is located below the multifunction

Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

lever on the steering column.

transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door

trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to

pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory

Seat” in this section for further information.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch

bank below the climate controls.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the

steering column is locked before driving your ve-

hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury or death.

Press the switch to turn on the heated

steering wheel. The light on the switch

will illuminate to indicate the steering

wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch

a second time will turn off the heated

steering wheel and light indicator.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

steering wheel to operate.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering

wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for

approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically

shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early

or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already

warm.

Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to

come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting

System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

WARNING!

•

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-

haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-

cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It

may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-

cially if used for long periods.

Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cush-

ion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to

overheat.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in

the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system

off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

1 — ON/OFF

4 — CANCEL

2 — RES +

3 — SET -

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have a collision. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

To Set A Desired Speed

To Vary The Speed Setting

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button

and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to

operate at the selected speed.

increase until the button is released, then the new set

speed will be established.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pressing the SET button.

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph

(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is

vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually

erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to

button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set decrease until the button is released. Release the button

speed memory.

when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed

will be established.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph

button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have a collision. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving

convenience provided by cruise control while traveling

on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a

safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in

light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant

need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar

sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.

WARNING!

•

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience

system. It is not a substitute for active driving

involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-

ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather

conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle

ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to

ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is always re-

quired while driving to maintain safe control of

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can

result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The ACC system:

NOTE:

•

If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,

ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

•

If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will

apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to

maintain a preset following distance, while matching

the speed of the vehicle ahead.

•

−

Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming ve-

hicles, and stationary objects (i.e., a stopped ve-

hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

−

Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions

You should switch off the ACC system:

into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight

distance conditions.

−

ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate

for such changes.

−

conditions, which can result in wrong or missing

distance warnings.

−

(for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on

the front of the vehicle.

−

•

When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,

sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations

(i.e., in highway construction zones).

Does not predict the lane curvature or the move-

•

When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;

when driving on roads that are winding, icy,

snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or

downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer.

When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a

constant speed.

Does not always fully recognize complex driving

•

May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light

Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s

braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a

complete stop.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

•

Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an

appropriate distance between vehicles.

Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising

at a constant preset speed. For additional information,

refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”

in this section. Note: The system will not react to

preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode

selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control

buttons. The two control modes function differently.

Always confirm which mode is selected.

1 — DISTANCE SETTING

2 — RES +

3 — SET -

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the

steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

4 — CANCEL

5 — ON/OFF

6 — MODE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following

vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:

Control.

•

When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

When you apply the brakes.

When the parking brake is set.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above

25 mph (40 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the READY state,

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-

plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”

When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-

VERSE or NEUTRAL.

•

When pushing the RES + button without a previously

set speed in memory.

When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

To Activate

To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF

Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and

the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”

the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system

on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-

tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you

want. You could lose control and have a collision.

Always leave the system off when you are not using

it.

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set

SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set speed. If this occurs:

speed.

•

The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in

the EVIC.

The system will not be controlling the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle

speed will only be determined by the position of the

accelerator pedal.

ACC Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

To Cancel

The system will disable ACC without erasing the

memory if:

•

You softly tap the brake pedal.

You depress the brake pedal.

You press the CANCEL switch.

An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.

A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

If the transmission is shifted into Neutral.

Driver Override

The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS is To Turn Off

off, ESC will automatically be re-engaged.

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in

memory if:

•

You push and release the ON/OFF button.

You turn OFF the ignition.

You switch off ESC.

You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

To Resume Speed

Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your

foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the

last set speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled

NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of

20 mph (32 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by

pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is

continually pressed, the set speed will continue to de-

crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is

released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the

EVIC display.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic

and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed

that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and

road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate

or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This

could cause a collision and/or serious injury.

Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph

(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

NOTE:

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by

pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is

continually pressed, the set speed will continue to in-

crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is

released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC

display.

•

When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the

engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle

sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system

will automatically slow the vehicle.

•

The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of

the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the

vehicle to a complete stop.

Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph

(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of

the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up

hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting

may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-

hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-

tain set speed.

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by

varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me-

dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the

vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the

vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.

Distance Setting 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Distance Setting 2

Distance Setting 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To change the distance setting, press the Distance button

and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance

setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.

•

The distance setting is changed.

The system disengages. (Refer to the information on

ACC Activation).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the

set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the

same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-

cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-

ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if

necessary.

matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the

the set speed.

ACC system applies the brakes.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts

that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to

maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert

“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound

•

The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set

speed.

The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking

the sensor.

capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately

apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle ahead.

The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph

(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages

itself.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Press the MENU button (located on the steer-

ing wheel) repeatedly until one of the follow-

ing displays in the EVIC:

Button

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

−

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read

“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

−

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting

has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive

Cruise Control Ready.”

Brake Alert

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The

EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument

cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The

information it displays depends on ACC system status.

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display.

−

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The set speed will continue to display in place of the

odometer reading when changing the EVIC display

while ACC is set.

•

Distance Setting Change

System Cancel

Acquisition/Loss of Target

Driver Override

System Off

ACC Proximity Warning

ACC Unavailable Warning

The EVIC will return to the last display selected

after five seconds of no ACC display activity.

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning

The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”

warning will display when conditions temporarily limit

system performance. This most often occurs at times of

poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC

Example Only

The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

•

Set Speed Change

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

system may also become temporarily blinded due to Control is still available. For additional information refer

obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this

EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of section.

Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of

an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the

vehicle behind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-

tant to note the following maintenance items:

•

Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the

sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to

damage the sensor lens.

Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so

could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and

require a sensor realignment.

Clear Radar Sensor Warning

NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of

Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your

authorized dealer for service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, To remove the sensor follow these instructions:

including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.

1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on

Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or

the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the

malfunction.

wiring or using any tools to remove the connector.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no

longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by

simply reactivating it.

2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the

back of the bracket.

3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket

to the bumper.

NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an

aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-

mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC

operation.

NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull

the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the

sensor.

Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading

Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location.

The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after

the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.

NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to re-

move the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the

front lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After

removing the lower fascia, you may remove the lower

sensor and bracket assembly.

A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.

Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise Service ACC Warning

Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/

Warning will not be available. The cluster will display the FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates

warning “ACC/FCW Unavailable - Service Radar Sen- there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is

sor.”

still drivable under normal conditions, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the

process above. The fastener torque required to assembly

the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 Nm).

ACC Unavailable Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/

FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a

temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal

conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this

occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key

cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection

issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-

edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to

intervene.

Adding A Trailer Hitch

The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance

of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance

following the installation of a hitch, such as reduced

detection range, please see your authorized dealer for

service.

Turns And Bends

Offset Driving

In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too

late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late

or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be

ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an

appropriate speed while driving in curves.

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is

offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be

sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle

may move in and out of the line of travel, which can

cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in

your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic

conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-

mance may be limited.

ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver

alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the

system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-

ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of

steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle

does not require service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Changing

ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the

lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and

it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC

system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until

it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient

distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-

tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of

the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they

have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-

cient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

General Information

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary

vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations

where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and

the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be

attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems

Classification Specifications:

47 C.F.R. Part 15

47 C.F.R Part 15.515

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal

(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis-

ing at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is

designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir-

ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control

can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph

(40 km/h).

WARNING!

In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will

not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity

warning does not activate and no alarm will sound

even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since

the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a

safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

To change modes, press the MODE button when the

system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.

“Cruise Ready” will be displayed if the system was in

ACC READY or ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will be

displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position. To

switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press the

MODE button a second time.

To Set A Desired Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the

SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set

speed.

NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or

changing speed, not the speedometer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Resume

There are two ways to change the set speed:

Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from

the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set

speed.

•

Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the

desired speed and press the SET - button.

To Turn Off

Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease

the set speed in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments respec-

tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph

(10 km/h) increments.

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in

memory if:

•

You push and release the ON/OFF button.

You turn off the ignition.

To Cancel

The system will disable normal Cruise Control without

erasing the memory if:

You switch off ESC.

You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

•

You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.

You press the CANCEL button.

If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,

the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or

The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- Normal Cruise Control).

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a

potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and

prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the

collision.

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking

sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),

wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end

collision. When the system determines that a rear-end

collision is probable a warning message (both audible

and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the

system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of

you is no longer probable, the warning message will be

deactivated.

FCW Message

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This

gives you the most reaction time.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to

avoid a collision on its own. The driver has the

responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow

this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Changing FCW Status

The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off

in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be

displayed in the EVIC.

Example Only

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle

vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This in front of you.

setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,

which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

Example Only

NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed

in the EVIC.

Example Only

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

•

FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over-

head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path

of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncom-

ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher

rate of speed.

FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un-

available screens.

FCW Unavailable Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/

FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a

temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal

conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this

FCW Off Example

NOTE:

•

The system will retain the last setting selected by the occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key

driver after ignition shut down.

cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Service FCW Warning

PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST —

If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ IF EQUIPPED

FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visual

there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is and audible indications of the distance between the rear

still drivable under normal conditions, have the system fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

checked by an authorized dealer.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense௡ System

Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and

recommendations.

ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in

REVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift lever

position, the system will remain active until the vehicle

speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or

above. The system will become active again if the vehicle

speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately

10 mph (16 km/h).

ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

ParkSenseா Sensors

The ParkSense௡ Warning Display is located in the Instru-

The four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/ ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is audible warnings to indicate the distance between the

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

ParkSenseா Warning Display

The ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-

grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

Rear Park Assist Display

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSenseா Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display

will turn ON indicating the system status.

Rear Park Assist Disabled

Rear Park Assist ON

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.

As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC

display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will

change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

Fast Tone

Slow Tone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display

shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.

The following chart shows the warning alert operation

when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

79 in (200 cm)

79-39 in

(200-100 cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in (30 cm)

Audible Alert

Chime

Display Message Park Assist ON

None

Single 1/2

Slow

Fast

Continuous

Second Tone

Warning Object

Detected

Warning Object

Detected

Warning Object

Detected

Warning Object

Detected

Arcs

None

3 Solid

3 Slow

2 Slow

1 Slow

(Continuous)

Flashing

Radio Mute

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense௡ will MUTE the radio, if on, when Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

the system is sounding an audio tone.

tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

Enabling and Disabling Park Senseா

ParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled with a switch

located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or

through the Customer-Programmable Features section of

the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or

When the ParkSense௡ switch is pressed to

disable the system, the instrument cluster will

display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Service the ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist System

Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist System is mal-

Instrument Panel” for further information. When the functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single

shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the

disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When

the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has

detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the

The ParkSense௡ switch LED will be ON when Park-

Sense௡ is disabled or defective. The ParkSense௡ switch

LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.

The ParkSense௡ system uses four sensors located in the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE

rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the

(200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense௡

display located above in the Instrument Cluster’s EVIC will not operate.

provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate

If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the

the range of the object.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and the

rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,

dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the

EVIC, see your authorized dealer.

•

When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the instrument cluster

will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off until you turn

it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

Cleaning the ParkSenseா System

Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the instrument

cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for

as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

ParkSenseா System Usage Precautions

•

ParkSense௡, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is

sounding a tone.

NOTE:

•

Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,

dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ system operat-

ing properly.

Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not

be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an

obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.

•

Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense௡.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,

must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do

so can result in the system misinterpreting a close

object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in

the instrument cluster.

CAUTION!

•

ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable

to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-

stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-

tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located

above or below the sensors will not be detected

when they are in close proximity.

The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time

when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended

that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when

using ParkSense௡.

•

On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense௡

should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered

or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A

lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that

an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Before using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist

System, it is strongly recommended that the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected

from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or

damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch

ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the

rear fascia when the warning display turns on the

single flashing arc and sounds the continuous

tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount

and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and

shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is

behind the vehicle.

•

Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist Sys-

tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-

trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and

blind spots before backing up. You are responsible

for safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA —

IF EQUIPPED

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear

camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ Rear appears again.

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen

When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width

image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever

the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be

displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display

screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur-

roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-

onds this note will disappear. The ParkView௡ camera is

located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License

plate.

of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the

center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/

receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones

that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the

vehicle. The following table shows the approximate

distances for each zone:

Zone

Distance to the rear of the vehicle

0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Red

Yellow

Green

1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/

her shoulder when using ParkView௡.

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with

water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning ParkViewா On or Off — With

Navigation/Multimedia Radio

CAUTION!

•

To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should only

be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera is

unable to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

1. Press the “menu” hard key.

2. Select “system setup” soft key.

3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting

“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.

5. Press the “save” soft key.

Turning ParkViewா On or Off — Without

Navigation/Multimedia Radio

1. Press the “menu” hard key.

2. Select “system setup” soft key.

3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting

“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights

Located on the overhead console are two courtesy/

reading lights. Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press

a second time to turn the lights off.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights

and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door

Opener (HomeLink௡), power liftgate and power sunroof

switches may also be included, if equipped.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for

the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-

sign. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the

chrome pad on the door to close.

Courtesy/Reading Lights

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is

opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the

dimmer wheel is moved up to the dome ON position.

Sunglass Storage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink௡ replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security

systems. The HomeLink௡ unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.

The HomeLink௡ buttons that are located in the overhead

console designate the three different HomeLink௡ chan-

nels.

HomeLink௡ Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

Programming HomeLinkா

WARNING!

Before You Begin

•

Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the universal transceiver.

Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other

objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener that has

a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal

safety standards. This includes most garage door

opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not

use a garage door opener without these safety

features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the

Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-

mation or assistance.

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink௡ buttons,

erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up

to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the

handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to

HomeLink௡ for more efficient training and accurate

transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage

when programming.

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter

away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away

from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to program while

keeping the indicator light in view.

•

After training a HomeLink௡ channel, if the garage

door does not operate with HomeLink௡ and the ga-

rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the

garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,

proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code

System.”

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen

HomeLink௡ button and the handheld transmitter button

until the HomeLink௡ indicator changes from a slow to a

rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink௡ 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink௡ button

and handheld transmitter buttons. and observe the indicator light.

Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is

When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate

30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.

open and close while you train.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and

NOTE:

then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming

•

Some gate operators and garage door openers may A Rolling Code System.”

require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in

the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.

Programming A Rolling Code System

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate

the “Learn” or “Training” button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING

wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by

NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.

door.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

2. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed

HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and

activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third

time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Training The Garage Door Opener

To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- at this time.

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-

Then proceed with Step

under “Programming

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡

HomeLink௡,” earlier in this section.

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to Using HomeLinkா

time-out in the same manner.

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink௡

button. Activation will now occur for the trained device

(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheld

transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkா Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button,

while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ has suc- 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until

cessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

release the button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-

ming HomeLink௡ Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

•

Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

Security

Did you unplug the device for training, and remember

to plug it back in?

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be

erased.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

two conditions:

Troubleshooting Tips

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, here

are some of the most common solutions:

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

•

Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

•

The transmitter has been tested and it complies with The power sunroof switch is located between the sun

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not visors on the overhead console.

expressly approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

•

The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical

specifications were met.

Power Sunroof Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Opening Sunroof — Express

WARNING!

Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof

will open automatically from any position. The sunroof

will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called

“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any

movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

•

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured too.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof

will close automatically from any position. The sunroof

will close fully and stop automatically. This is called

“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

•

Pinch Protect Feature

Do not allow small children to operate the sun-

roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or

any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-

tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press

the switch forward and release to Express Close.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Sunshade Operation

sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

disabled.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

Pinch Protect Override

open.

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing

the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two

seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof

to move toward the closed position.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

pressed.

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will

open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,

and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During

Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition OFF Operation

The power sunroof switches remain active for up ap-

proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has

been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel

this feature.

COMMAND VIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER

SHADE — IF EQUIPPED

The command view sunroof switch is located to the left

between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches

The power shade switch is located to the right between

the sun visors on the overhead console.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Sunroof – Express

WARNING!

Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one second

and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically slide

fully open from any position, then stop. This is called

“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any

sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the

sunroof. If the shade is closed when the sunroof switch is

pressed, the shade will automatically move to the middle

position before the sunroof begins Express Open operation.

•

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured too.

•

Venting Sunroof – Express

Press the center “Vent” button on the sunroof switch for

less than one second and release, and the sunroof glass

will automatically vent fully open from any position,

then stop. This is called “Express Vent”. During Express

Vent operation, any sunroof switch press or shade switch

press will stop the sunroof. If the shade is closed when

the vent switch is pressed, the shade will automatically

move to the middle position before the sunroof begins

Express Vent operation.

Do not allow small children to operate the sun-

roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or

any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

Closing Sunroof – Express

Closing Power Shade – Express

Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second Press the shade switch forward for less than one second

and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically and release, and the shade will automatically close, then

close from any position, then stop. This is called “Express stop. This is called “Express Shade Close”. If the sunroof

Close”. During Express Close operation, any sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of

switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof. the middle position, the shade will move to the middle

position then stop. If the sunroof is not at the closed

Opening Power Shade – Express

position and the shade is at the middle position, the

Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second

sunroof will automatically move to the fully closed posi-

and release, and the shade will automatically open, then

tion before the shade begins Express Shade Close opera-

stop. This is called “Express Shade Open”. If the shade is

tion. During Express Shade Close operation, any sunroof

forward of the middle position, it will move to the

switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade.

middle position then stop. If the shade is at or rearward

of the middle position, it will move to the full open Sunroof and Power Shade Movement – Manual

position then stop. During Express Shade Open opera- If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for

tion, any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will more than one second, the sunroof or shade movement

stop the shade.

will continue only as long as the switch is continuously

held. Whenever the switch is released, any sunroof or

shade movement will stop. This allows the sunroof or

shade to be stopped at any desired partially open position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Feature

Method 2: If three consecutive sunroof or shade close

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close

the sunroof or the shade during any close operation. If an attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch

obstruction is detected, the sunroof or shade will auto- Protect disabled.

matically reverse direction to release the obstruction. If

Pinch Protect Override Cancellation

this occurs, remove the obstruction and then press the

Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position,

sunroof or shade switch forward to complete the desired

Pinch Protect will reactivate. In addition, if any other

close motion.

switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade

Pinch Protect Override

away from the closed position, Pinch Protect will

Method 1: If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc) reactivate.

prevents closing of the sunroof or shade, press the

Wind Buffeting

corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds

after the reversal motion ends. After two seconds, all

closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch

Protect disabled. This will allow the sunroof or shade to

move towards the closed position.

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs Sunroof Fully Closed

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

sunroof is fully closed.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power

outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small

electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.

The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a

“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.

Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when

the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while

the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly

to the battery and powered at all times.

Ignition OFF Operation

The power sunroof switches can be programmed to

remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after

the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-

Programmable Features (System Setup)” under “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

•

NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this

feature.

All accessories connected to the “battery” powered

outlets should be removed or turned off when the

vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against

discharge.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ knob and

element must be used.

Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power

rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will

need to be replaced.

The front power outlet is located inside the storage area

on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward

on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain

access to this power outlet.

Front Power Outlet

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power

outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

Center Console Outlet

Rear Power Outlet

WARNING!

The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo

area.

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Only devices designed for use in this type of

outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use and while driving

the vehicle.

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

•

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-

mittently and with greater caution.

After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

•

CAUTION!

•

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent the engine from starting.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the

back of the center console to convert DC current to AC

current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-

ics and other low power devices requiring power up to

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play- the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating

most power tools.

exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter

may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter

manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.

To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings

on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

The power inverter switch is located

on the switch bank below the Climate

Controls. To turn on the power outlet,

press the switch once. Press the switch

a second time to turn the power outlet

off.

NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,

there will be a delay of approximately one second before

the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indica-

tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the

inverter is producing AC power.

Power Inverter

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers

located in the center console.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Do not use a three-prong adaptor.

Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use.

If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Front Cupholder Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE

located in the fold-down center armrest.

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the right side of the

instrument panel.

Rear Cupholders

Glove Compartment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage

latch and lower the glove box door.

Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy

access.

Opened Glove Compartment

Door Panel Storage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

Center Console

To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on

The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.

storage area.

Storage Compartment Latches

Storage Compartment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light

lower storage compartment.

bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries

that recharge when snapped back into place.

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

Lower Storage Compartment

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Press And Release

Rechargeable Flashlight

The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of

the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage Bins

twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

There are four removable storage bins located in the rear

cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either

side of the cargo area.

Three-Press Switch

Rear Storage Bins

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Two additional storage bins are located under the load

floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor

and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the

load floor) to the liftgate opening.

Lower Storage Bins

Tether Strap

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to

secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or

protect passengers from loose cargo.

To cover the cargo area:

1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the

cargo area.

2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in

the pillar trim cover.

3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in

place.

Rear Cargo Cover

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could

cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and

strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo

cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-

ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken

from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,

should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is

moving.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits

described on the label attached to the left door or

left door center pillar.

Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as

possible.

Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed

weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the

rear of the vehicle to sway.

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

accident.

•

To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The

rear cargo space is intended for load carrying

purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit

in seats and use seat belts.

Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or acci-

dent, a hook could pull loose and allow the child

seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.

Use only the anchors provided for child seat

tethers.

The weight and position of cargo and passengers

can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-

hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting

in personal injury, follow these guidelines for

loading your vehicle:

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the

first detent for intermittent operation and to the

second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch

located on the control lever. The control lever is located

on the left side of the steering column.

Rotating the center portion upward once more will

activate the washer pump which will continue to

operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release

of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear

wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF

position, rotating it downward will activate the rear

washer pump which will continue to operate as long as

the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will

return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two

times before returning to the parked position.

NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if

the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the

switch is released the pump will resume normal opera-

tion.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear

OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” window defroster only when the engine is operating.

position.

CAUTION!

If the liftgate flipper glass is open, the rear window

wiper/washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper

stops at that “park” position. When the liftgate flipper

glass is closed, the rear wiper will resume wiper/washer

functionality after five seconds.

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to

the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off

after soaking with warm water.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the

climate control panel. Press this button to turn on

the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors

(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate

when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window

defroster automatically turns off after approximately

10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,

press the button a second time.

•

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into

weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The position.

load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be

uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE:

•

To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not

in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxi-

mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction

can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar

forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized

dealer can order and install MOPAR௡ crossbars built

specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.

The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying

capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo

inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not

exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed

over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may

experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For

improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the

rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.

To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at

the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight

turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the

MOPAR௡ crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the

desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the

The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if

equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do

not carry any loads on the roof rack without the

crossbars installed. The load should be secured

and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on

the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the

roof, place a blanket or some other protection

between the load and the roof surface.

•

Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-

fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the

roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or

nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to

a load. This is especially true on large flat loads

and may result in damage to the cargo or your

vehicle.

•

To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do

not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of

150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as

evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-

ately.

Long loads which extend over the windshield,

such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with

large frontal area should be secured to both the

front and rear of the vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your

vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the

vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-

sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack

cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 268

▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 254

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

▫ Vehicle Info

▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 272

▫ Tire Psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 293

▫ Customer-Programmable Features

(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Ⅵ Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio

(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Ⅵ Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/

RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 294

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

▫ Operating Instructions

(Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . 284

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 304

▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 304

▫ Operating Instructions

(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 284

Ⅵ Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 284

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 285

▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Operating Instructions

(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 309

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

Ⅵ iPod௡/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 309 Ⅵ Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ Connecting The iPod௡ Or External USB

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Ⅵ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 320

Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Or External USB

Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Dual-Zone Manual Heating And Air

Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control

Ⅵ Uconnect™ Multimedia

(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped. . . . . . . . 316

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Ⅵ Video Entertainment System™

(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet

5 — Climate Controls

9 — Fuel Door Release

10 — Headlight Switch

11 — Hood Release

2 — Instrument Cluster

3 — Radio

6 — Lower Switch Bank

7 — Storage Bin

4 — Glove Compartment

8 — Ignition Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to

ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

1. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,

poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light

stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In

most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will

not require towing.

2. Airbag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is

either not on during starting, stays on, or turns

on while driving, then have the system inspected at an

authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

damage to the engine control system. It also could

affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is

flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and

power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is

required.

3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of

an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that

monitors engine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

system. If this light remains on after several ignition

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles

(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see

your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the

problem diagnosed and corrected.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could

result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-

pants or others.

NOTE:

•

The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-

mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to

ON/RUN.

4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped

•

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC

system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON/RUN position. It should go out with the

engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-

dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine

running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the TOW/

HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/

HAUL button is located in the center of the

instrument panel (below the climate controls).

9. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped

The symbol indicates the status of the Hill

Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will

be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only

be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD

Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph

(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt-

ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will

flash on/off.

6. Turn Signal Indicator

The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals

when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will

chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn

signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

10. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Display/Odometer Display

The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-

7. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

hicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of

vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the

correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair

technician should leave the odometer reading the same

8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those

make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ tires.)

service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

must be reset at zero.

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) mes- Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

sages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

11. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly, when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly.

low tire pressure telltale.

CAUTION!

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or

balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

12. Position Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park

lights or headlights are turned on.

14. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on, it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with

13. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to the the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb

check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will

sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver

or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat

Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.

Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-

tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the

condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to

the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying

the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during

each stop.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have

tion.

the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 16. 4 LOW

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in

the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and

rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-

gether forcing the front and rear wheels to

15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition

rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater

gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the

wheels.

switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and

may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

For further information on four-wheel drive operation

and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —

If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.

17. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

18. Fuel Door Reminder

22. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red

The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Telltale Area

vehicle where the fuel door is located. This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell-

tales. For further information refer to “Electronic vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)”.

19. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when

the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-

20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White

Telltale Area

trol (ESC) is off.

This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white

telltales. For further information refer to “Electronic 24. Vehicle Security Light

vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.

This light will flash rapidly for approximately

15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is

arming. The light will flash at a slower speed

continuously after the alarm is set. The security

light will also come on for about three seconds when the

ignition is first turned on.

21. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Amber Telltale Area

This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber

caution telltales. For further information refer to “Elec-

tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

25. Temperature Gauge

WARNING!

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-

ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you

decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-

taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the

Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,

turn the engine off immediately, and call an autho-

rized dealership for service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

The EVIC consists of the following:

•

System Status

Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

Compass Display

Outside Temperature Display

Trip Computer Functions

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button

pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

Press and release the UP button to scroll up-

ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,

Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,

System Setup) and sub menus.

DOWN Button

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll

downward through the main menus and sub

menus.

SELECT Button

Press and release the SELECT button for access

to main menus, sub menus or to select a

personal setting in the setup menu. Press and

hold the SELECT button for two seconds to

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

reset features.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BACK Button

•

Right front turn signal lamp out

Left rear turn signal lamp out

Right rear turn signal lamp out

Check Tire Pressure

Press the BACK button to scroll back to a

previous menu or sub menu.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays

the following messages:

ESC System Off

Service blind spot system

Blind spot detection unavailable

Blind spot system off

•

Service Tire Pressure System

Service Park Assist System

Park Assist System Blinded

Park Assist Disabled

Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked

Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed

Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Keyfob Battery Low

Liftglass Open

Left front turn signal lamp out

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

•

Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

•

Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after

setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

•

ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.

Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Distance Set — After changing the desired following

distance in the ACC system, this message will display

momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” (if equipped).

ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC

system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if

equipped).

•

Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum

braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set

distance, this message will flash and a chime will

sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum

braking capacity. When this occurs, you should imme-

diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

•

ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a

slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the

ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting

conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”

in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if

equipped).

•

Oil change due

Key in ignition

Lights on

Key in Ignition Lights On

Ignition or Accessory On

Ignition or Accessory On. Lights On

Turn signal on

ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the

ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction

that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Park assist on

ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the

ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault

that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer

to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understand-

ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Warning object detected

Remote start aborted — Door ajar

Remote start aborted — Hood ajar

Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar

Remote start aborted — Fuel low

•

Coolant low

Service air suspension system

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

•

Remote start disabled — System fault

Remote start disabled — Turn key

Remote start active — Key to Run

Memory 1 profile set

•

Function currently unavailable — Power Liftgate

Unlock to operate — Power Liftgate

Put in Park to operate — Power Liftgate

Automatic high beams on

Memory 2 profile set

Automatic high beams off

Memory system unavailable — Not in Park

Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled

Memory 1 profile recall

Service Four Wheel Drive System

Four Wheel Drive System in neutral

ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator

Memory 2 profile recall

TERRAIN SETTINGS — AUTOMATIC

TERRAIN SETTINGS — ROCK

TERRAIN SETTINGS — SAND/MUD

TERRAIN SETTINGS — SNOW

TERRAIN SETTINGS — SPORT

Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start

Wrong Key

Damaged Key

Key not programmed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required

Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required

•

Off Road Ride Height Level 1 — This message is

displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has

achieved the Off Road Height Level 1.

To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in

Owners Manual

Off Road Ride Height Level 2 — This message is

displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has

achieved the Off Road Height Level 2.

•

For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in

N Press 4 Low

Vehicle Lowered To Entry/Exit (Park) Height — This

message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle

has achieved the Park Height.

For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans

in N Press 4 Low

•

Terrain System Settings Not Available

Raising Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)

Lowering Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)

Entry/Exit (Park) Height in Progress — This message

is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the request is made

to go into Entry/Exit Height while the vehicle speed is

between 15 and 25 mph. This shows that the request

has been recognized and will lower to Entry/Exit

height when vehicle is below 15 mph.

Normal Vehicle Ride Height — This message is dis-

played (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved

the Normal Vehicle Ride Height.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

•

Service Air Suspension System — This is displayed

when a fault has occurred in the system. The system

will have limited operation at that point.

•

Air Suspension System Cooling Down – Please Wait —

This message is displayed if the compressor tempera-

ture level is too high. Level control is suspended until

the compressor has cooled down.

Immediate Air Suspension Service/Repair Required

— This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the

system which results in a complete system shutdown.

The system will be non operational at that point.

Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered – Door Open — This

message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and

level control is suspended.

•

Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height —

This message is displayed in advance warning to the

driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower

preset position unless the speed is reduced.

•

Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And

Tire Change

Aerodynamic Ride Height — This is displayed (for

5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody-

namic Height.

Selected Ride Height Not Permitted — The vehicle

speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels

(Entry/Exit Level/Off Road Ride Height Level 1/Off

Road Ride Height Level 2).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EVIC White Telltale Lights

This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

•

Electronic Speed Control SET

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET. For further information,

refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

•

Shift Lever Status

The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed

indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”

indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has

been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For

further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Oper-

ating”

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON

This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

•

Electronic Speed Control ON

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is ON. For further information,

refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

•

Power Steering System Over Temperature —

If Equipped

•

If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER

TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on the

EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering

maneuvers may have occurred, which caused

EVIC Amber Telltale Lights

This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

an over temperature condition in the power steering

system. You will lose power steering assistance momen-

tarily until the over temperature condition no longer

exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and

let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system will cool

•

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF

This light warns the driver of a potential colli-

sion with the vehicle in front of you and

prompts the driver to take action in order to

avoid the collision. For further information,

and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-

in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Air Suspension Up

The air suspension up telltale will illuminate

NOTE:

•

Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-

tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under

these conditions there will be a substantial increase in

steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds

and during parking maneuvers.

when the air suspension is in use. For further

information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Air Suspension Down

to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the

The air suspension down telltale will illumi- message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

nate when the air suspension is in use. For

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

further information, refer to “Starting And Op-

may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

erating”.

•

Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This light will turn on to indicate the windshield

washer fluid is low.

•

Low Fuel Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal

(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until

fuel is added.

•

SERV 4WD

The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift

4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or

comes on during driving, it means that the

4WD system is not functioning properly and

Loose Gascap Indicator

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator

will display in the telltale display area. Tighten

that service is required.

the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

EVIC Red Telltale Lights

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These

telltales include:

•

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The

light should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A

chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns

on.

•

Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or

more door may be ajar.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Liftgate Ajar

may be ajar.

•

Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charg-

ing system. The light should come on when the

Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate

flipper glass may be ajar.

ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly

as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential

electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

the charging system light remains on, it means that the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running your

system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle, will usually be drivable, however, see an autho-

rized dealer.

rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is

flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is

required and you may experience reduced performance,

an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle

may require towing.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

•

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The

light will come on when the ignition is first

turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

•

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a

check. If the light does not come on during starting, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a

engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is to cool.

placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-

hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To

Do In Emergencies” for more information.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

•

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive trans-

mission fluid temperature that might occur

with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may

also occur when operating the vehicle in a high

WARNING!

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is

illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,

in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to

boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust

components and cause a fire.

torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive

operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this

light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle

or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the

light goes off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the Fuel Economy

engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel

upon your personal driving style.

Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press

the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN

buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func-

tions displays in the EVIC:

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and

release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-

tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)

refer to the following procedure.

•

Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not

start the engine).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the

Trip Computer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-

tion:

Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode —

If Equipped

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the

history information will be erased, and the averaging will

continue from the last fuel average reading before the

reset.

Fuel Saver Mode — On

This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving

in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify

driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the

average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message

will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the

engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving

in a fuel efficient manner.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Vehicle Speed

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the

determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT

tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure

button.

between mph or km/h

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the

the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

EVIC.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) Trip Info

estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip

to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the

until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN but-

amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in

FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.

the EVIC:

•

Trip A

Trip B

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

•

Elapsed Time

To Reset The Display

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being

displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to

clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the

Trip Computer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button

tion:

for two seconds. Current display will reset along with

other functions

Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Units

reset.

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”

displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT

button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if

equipped) can be changed between English and Metric

units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or

down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then

Trip B

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last

reset.

Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark

when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON selected.

or START position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “SYS-

TEM” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.

Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the

available information displays, then press SELECT to

display anyone of the following choices.

Tire PSI

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire

PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the

SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN but-

tons until one of the following System Status messages

displays in the EVIC:

•

Coolant Temp

Displays the actual coolant temperature.

•

System OK

System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently

active System Warnings)

•

Oil Temperature

Displays the actual oil temperature.

•

Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres-

sure of all four road tires). For additional information,

refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting

And Operating”.

•

Oil Pressure

Displays the actual oil pressure.

•

Trans Temperature

Displays the actual transmission temperature.

•

Engine Hours

Displays the hours of engine operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

•

Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,

kPa, or BAR.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped

When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to

change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go

icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the

EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat-

ing” for more information.

NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be

superseded by another display of higher priority. But

when the ignition switch position is changed, the display

always re-appears.

Tire Pressure Display

NOTE:

•

Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat

will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi

(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer

to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures”

in “Starting And Operating” for additional informa-

tion.

Compass / Temperature Display

The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is

facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass

readings and the outside temperature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and

temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to an environment free from large metallic objects such as

be driven several minutes before the updated tempera- buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,

ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the etc.

displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings

are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator

Manual Compass Calibration

Automatic Compass Calibration

does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:

need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is

new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will

1. Turn ON the ignition switch.

display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup

also calibrate the compass by completing one or more (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,

360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or then press the SELECT button.

metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the

3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is

EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

displayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the

calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the

EVIC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area

free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”

indicator turns off. The compass will now function

normally.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences, and provide the most accurate compass

heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the

compass must be set using the following steps.

Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of

the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,

Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass

module is located, and it can cause interference with the

compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup

(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,

then press the SELECT button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” Select Language

message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT When in this display you may select one of five lan-

button. The last variance zone number displays in the guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip

EVIC.

functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press

the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll

through the language choices. Press the SELECT button

to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),

Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder-

lands). Then, as you continue, the information will dis-

play in the selected language.

4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper

variance zone is selected, according to the map.

5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.

Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)

Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features

when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is Nav–Turn By Turn

out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning When this feature is selected, the navigation system

message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive

seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.

route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-

tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release

the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to

the feature showing the system has been activated or the

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup

displays in the EVIC.

Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the check-mark is removed, showing the system has been

following choices.

deactivated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

Auto Lock Doors

Remote Unlock Sequence

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto- When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the

(24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter

feature showing the system has been activated, or the UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.

check-mark is removed showing the system has been When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of

deactivated.

the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE

transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,

scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high-

lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

Auto Unlock Doors

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press and release the

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-

feature showing the system has been activated, or the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to

check-mark is removed showing the system has been Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no

deactivated.

matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is

grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only

the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is the system has been activated or the check-mark is

programmed touching the handle more than once will removed, showing the system has been deactivated.

only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The

first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the Features Of Your Vehicle”.

interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock

all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

Remote Start Comfort Sys.

When this feature is selected and the remote start is

RKE Linked To Memory

activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated

When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.

transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will

profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.

settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals These features will stay on through the duration of

(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make

(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets. your selection, press and release the SELECT button until

When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the

driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,

make your selection, press and release the SELECT showing the system has been deactivated.

button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

Horn with Remote Lock

Flash Lamps With Lock

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked

This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected

Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.

and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap- To make your selection, press and release the SELECT

pears next to the feature showing the system has been button until a check-mark appears next to the feature

activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the showing the system has been activated or the check-mark

system has been deactivated.

is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.

Horn With Remote Start

Headlamp Off Delay

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,

feature showing the system has been activated or the then press and release the SELECT button until a check-

check-mark is removed, showing the system has been mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has

deactivated.

been selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Headlamps with Wipers

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)

(Available with Memory Seat Only)

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make feature showing the system has been activated or the

your selection, press and release the SELECT button until check-mark is removed, showing the system has been

a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the deactivated.

system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

showing the system has been deactivated.

location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the

causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding

brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Tilt Mirror in Reverse

When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mir-

rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the

RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their Illuminated Approach

previous position when the transmission is shifted out of When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your

feature showing the system has been activated or the selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is

check-mark is removed, showing the system has been highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button

deactivated.

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

that setting has been selected.

Key-Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped

switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/

video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), Temperature display, this message can be turned on or

and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-

after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your

Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)

selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s

highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button

door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and

that setting has been selected.

release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

next to the feature showing the system has been activated Wiper Mode — If Equipped

or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

on the windshield. To make your selection, press and

release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears

next to the feature showing the system has been activated

or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has

been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the

system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper

operation.

Auto High Beams (Available with SmartBeam™

Only)

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To

make your selection, press and release the SELECT

button until a check-mark appears next to the feature

showing the system has been activated or the check-mark Hill Start Assist (HSA)

is removed, showing the system has been deactivated. When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.

Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Un- Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting

derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further And Operating” for system function and operating infor-

information.

mation. To make your selection, press and release the

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the

feature showing the system has been activated or the

check-mark is removed, showing the system has been

deactivated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

Blind Spot Alert

Forward Collision Warning

There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can

By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once, the be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status

Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot: of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will

Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front

Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only of you when you are farther away. This gives you the

show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing and most reaction time. To change the setting for more

releasing the SELECT button a second time “Blind Spot: dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you

Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode the Blind of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you

Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside when you are much closer. This allows for a more

mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press

on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is selected the Blind Spot and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-

Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.

pears next to the feature showing the system has been

activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the

system has been deactivated.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in

the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is

not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con-

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result Vehicle”.

in the BSM not operating to specification.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Display Units of Measure In:

Operating Instructions

The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped) (Voice Command System) — If Equipped

can be changed between English and Metric units of Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User

measure. To make your selection, press and release the Manual located on the DVD for further details.

SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —

Calibrate Compass

If Equipped

Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Compass Variance

Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)

MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/

RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side

of the unit’s faceplate.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or

RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning

the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

Media Center 130 (RES)

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

position to operate the radio.

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIME Button

RW/FF

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

and radio frequency.

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

TUNE Control

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

SCROLL control knob. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will begin to blink.

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

knob to save time change.

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Memory

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the When you are receiving a station that you wish to

treble tones.

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto

this station and press and release that button. If a button

is not selected within five seconds after pressing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the front and rear speakers.

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

AM/FM Button

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

•

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)

stations).

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

DISC Button

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

position to operate the radio.

show the track number, and index time in minutes and

seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

CAUTION!

•

This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

•

SEEK Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Notes on Playing MP3 Files

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or file recording media and formats are limited. When

RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

button works in a similar manner.

tions.

AM/FM Button

Supported Media (Disc Types)

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

change of pace.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

domly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

•

Maximum number of files: 255

Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after

writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats

a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

display.)

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

character extension)

Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

character extension)

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rate.

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 Files

MPEG

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Specification

320, 256, 224, 192,

160, 128, 112, 96,

80, 64, 56, 48, 40,

160, 128, 144, 112,

96, 80, 64, 56, 48,

40, 32, 24, 16, 8

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which (SALES CODE RES+RSC)

allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to

auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is

not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX

audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is

OFF).

Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping until you release it.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped

Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —

If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature

(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the

Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further

details.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the will begin to blink.

Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

details.

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio

screen.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.

For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the

SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite

radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above

procedure, starting at Step 2.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time

and radio frequency.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFO Button

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). mid-range tones.

RW/FF

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either treble tones.

AM or FM frequencies.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

TUNE Control

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

MUSIC TYPE Button

Program Type

Information

Jazz

16-Digit Character Display

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Inform

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Nostalga

Oldies

Persnlty

Public

R & B

Rel Musc

Rel Talk

Rock

Personality

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type

No program type or

undefined

16-Digit Character Display

None

Adult Hits

Classical

Classic Rock

College

Adlt Hit

Classicl

Cls Rock

College

Country

Language

Soft

Soft Rock

Soft Rhythm and Blues

Sports

Soft Rck

Soft R&B

Sports

Talk

Country

Foreign Language

Talk

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set

the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL

control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob

to save time change.

Program Type

Top 40

16-Digit Character Display

Top 40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon

is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM

mode.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this

station and press and release that button. If a button is

not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/

RND button, the station will continue to play but will not

be stored into pushbutton memory.

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between

the following items:

•

Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow

you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Play

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC

position to operate the radio.

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Buttons 1 - 6

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

DISC/AUX Button

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode

and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display

will show the track number, and index time in minutes

and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

CAUTION!

•

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

SEEK Button

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of change of pace.

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

domly selected track.

CD and MP3 modes.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-

dom Play.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

RW/FF

file recording media and formats are limited. When

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

tions.

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after

writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Maximum number of files: 255

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200

files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the supported.

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

Playback of MP3 Files

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

VBR bit rates.

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

MPEG

Specification

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

320, 256, 224, 192,

160, 128, 112, 96,

80, 64, 56, 48, 40,

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

160, 128, 144, 112,

96, 80, 64, 56, 48,

40, 32, 24, 16, 8

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

24, 22.05, 16

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a timeЉ priority mode.

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or

before writing to the disc.

more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders

to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s

playable files).

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

Name, and Folder Name (if available). device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the System Activation

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you

down.

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio

service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-

come kit that contains general information, including

how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or

visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when the

ignition is OFF).

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —

If Equipped

www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when

calling:

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has

limited coverage in Alaska.

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within

the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly

on or above the antenna.

ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll Reception Quality

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the following reasons:

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number

•

The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.

display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on

the radio to exit this screen.

Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode

Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

Satellite Antenna

Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can

cause signal blockage.

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia

(Satellite) Mode

INFO Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-

tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-

able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an

additional three seconds will make the radio display the

Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or

ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).

channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek

up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will

remain tuned to the new channel until you make another

selection. Holding either button will bypass channels

without stopping until you release it.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-

tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN

button a second time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MUSIC TYPE Button

SETUP Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the

mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button following items:

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

•

Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This

number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

type.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish to

function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.

channel with the same selected Music Type name.

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel

and press and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-

ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by iPodா/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This

allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton

twice.

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/

REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code

RER, REN, RBZ, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen

radio iPod௡ /MP3 control feature, refer to the separate

RER, REN, RBZ, RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. iPod௡ /MP3

control is available only if equipped as an option with

these radios.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to be

plugged into the USB port, located in the center console

or glove compartment.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

iPod௡ /MP3 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G

iPod௡ and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software ver-

sions may not fully support the iPod௡ /MP3 control

features. Please visit Apple’s website for software up-

Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —

If Equipped

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User dates.

Manual located on the DVD for further details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

•

If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate

Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for

iPod௡ or external USB device support capability.

•

Connecting an iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio

device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,

plays media, but does not use the iPod௡ /MP3 control

feature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPodா or External USB Device

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod௡ or external

USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port

which is located in the center console or glove compart-

ment.

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to

the vehicle’s iPod௡ /MP3 control system (iPod௡ or exter-

nal USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the

audio device starts charging and is ready for use by

pressing radio switches, as described below.

•

The audio device can be controlled using the radio

buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents.

The audio device battery charges when plugged into

the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific

audio device)

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-

charged, it may not communicate with the iPod௡ /MP3

control system until a minimum charge is attained.

Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod௡ /MP3

control system may charge it to the required level.

Controlling The iPodா or External USB Device

Using Radio Buttons

To get into the iPod௡ /MP3 control (iPod௡ or external

USB device) mode and access a connected audio device,

either press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or

press VR button and say ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once

Using This Feature

By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to in the iPod௡ /MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if avail-

USB port:

able from audio device) start playing over the vehicle’s

audio system.

•

The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound

system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,

etc.) information on the radio display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Play Mode

•

Jump backward in the current track by pressing and

holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW

button long enough will jump to the beginning of

the current track.

When switched to iPod௡ /MP3 control mode, the iPod௡

or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In

Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate

may be used to control the iPod௡ or external USB device

and display data:

•

Jump forward in the current track by pressing and

holding the FF >> button.

•

Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or

previous track.

A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will

jump backward or forward respectively, for five

seconds.

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while

playing a track, skips to the next track or press VR

button and say ЉNext TrackЉ.

•

Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the

previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button

during play mode will jump to the next track in the

list, or can press VR button and say ЉNext or Previous

TrackЉ.

•

Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one

click, will jump to the previous track in the list or

press VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ

While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see

the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)

for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

to the next screen of data for that track. Once all

screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press

will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

device, or press VR button and say ЉShuffle ONЉ or

ЉShuffle OffЉ. If the RND icon is showing on the radio

display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

•

Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio List Or Browse Mode

device mode to repeat the current playing track or During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described

press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables

OffЉ.

scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the

audio device.

Press the SCAN button to use iPod௡ /MP3 device scan

mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each

track in the current list and then forward to the next

song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the

desired track, when it is playing the track, press the

SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the

<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-

ous and next tracks.

•

TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions

in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the or

external USB device.

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-

wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying

the track detail on the radio display. Once the track

to be played is highlighted on the radio display,

press the TUNE control knob to select and start

playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob

•

RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod௡ or external USB

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast

scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on

the radio display may be noticeable.

•

Pressing a PRESET button will display the current

list on the top line and the first item in that list on

the second line.

•

During all List modes, the iPod௡ displays all lists in

“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the

bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards

(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the

same PRESET button again to go back to Play

mode.

•

LIST button: The LIST button will display the top

level menu of the iPod௡ or external USB device. Turn

the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be

selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will

display the next sub-menu list item on the audio

device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired

track in that list. Not all iPod௡ or external USB device

sub-menu levels are available on this system.

In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as

shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡ or

external USB device.

•

Preset 1 – Playlists

Preset 2 – Artists

Preset 3 – Albums

Preset 4 – Genres

Preset 5 – Audiobooks

Preset 6 – Podcasts

MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on your

audio device.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the

Uconnect™ phone system.

CAUTION!

•

Leaving the iPod௡ or external USB device (or any

supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in

extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or

damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-

er’s guidelines.

Placing items on the iPod௡ or external USB device,

or connections to the iPod௡ or external USB device

in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device

and/or to the connectors.

Controlling BTSA using Radio Buttons

To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on

the radio or press VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-

ing Audio”.

Play Mode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can

start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but

some devices require the music to be initiated on the

device first, then it will get streamed to Uconnect™

phone system. Seven devices can be paired to Uconnect™

phone system, but just one can be selected and played.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ or external USB

device while driving. Failure to follow this warning

could result in an accident.

Selecting different Audio Device

1. Press PHONE button to begin.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect™ Multimedia

ЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ.

(SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — IF EQUIPPED

Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting

technology to provide streaming video. The subscription

service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. Uconnect™

studio (SIRIUS Backseat TV™) offers three video chan-

3. Say name of the audio device or ask Uconnect™

phone system to list audio devices.

Next Track

Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the nels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites

radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track and broadcasting studios.

music on your cellular phone.

NOTE: SIRIUS Backseat TV™ service is not available in

Previous Track

Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on

the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the

previous track music on your cellular phone.

Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the

DVD, RER Navigation, RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multi-

media User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.

Browse

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™

(SALES CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED

The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-

sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)

Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the

current song that is playing will display info.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-

sets. Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of

Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further

details.

The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the

front seats.

Remote Control Location

Lowering the Display Screen

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker

access the switches.

switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom

of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch

between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/

CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Remote Sound System Controls

(Back View Of Steering Wheel)

Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch

will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.

precautions:

CD Player

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.

track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the

beginning of the previous track if it is within one second

after the current track begins to play.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

ing the disc.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or anti-static sprays.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no

function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the

center button will select the next available CD in the

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

player.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Dual-Zone Manual Heating and Air Conditioning

lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective

coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

The Dual-Zone Manual Climate Controls allow both

turned down or off during mobile phone operation when

driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indi-

not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).

vidual comfort settings. The controls consist of a series of

outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

Blower Control

•

Passenger Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the

amount of air forced through the ven-

tilation system in any mode. The

blower speed increases as you move

the control to the right from the “O”

(OFF) position. There are seven blower

speeds.

Rotate this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment for the right front seat

occupant. Rotating the dial left into

the blue area of the scale indicates

cooler temperatures while rotating

right into the red area indicates

warmer temperatures.

Temperature Controls

Driver Temperature Control

Rotate this control to regulate the tem-

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems

lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-

denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-

tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray

from behind the radiator and through the condenser.

Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the

condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

•

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment for the left front seat

occupant. Rotating the dial left into

the blue area of the scale indicates

cooler temperatures while rotating

right into the red area indicates

warmer temperatures.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Floor

Push the mode control buttons to choose from several

patterns of air distribution.

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount flowing through the defrost and side

window demist outlets.

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument Mix

panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be

aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat

passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining

comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Bi-Level

Defrost

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-

mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-

shield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there

is a difference in temperature between the upper and

lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.

This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but

cool conditions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

NOTE:

•

In Floor, Mix and Defrost modes a small amount of air

will flow through the outboard panel outlets for

occupant comfort.

•

Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

•

The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,

Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air

Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-

midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve

fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

•

The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp

weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,

because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select

the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.

•

The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging

when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode

control is set to panel or panel / floor.

Recirculation Control

Pressing the Recirculation Control button will

put the system in recirculation mode. This can

be used when outside conditions such as

smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-

ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the

control button to illuminate.

•

The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-

ing the mode control selection.

When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position or the ignition switch START/STOP button is

cycled to OFF, the recirculation feature will be

cancelled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Conditioning Control

Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control

Press this button to engage the Air (ATC) — If Equipped

Conditioning. A light will illuminate

when the Air Conditioning System is

engaged. Rotating the dial left into the

blue area of the scale indicates cooler

temperatures while rotating right into

the red area indicates warmer tem-

peratures.

•

The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows

both driver and front passenger seat occupants to

select individual comfort settings.

When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode

operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a

push button on the control unit and a comfort tem-

perature setting by using the temperature up and

down buttons.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage

until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

•

The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-

timum comfort and convenience.

•

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation

buttons at the same time.

The system can be controlled manually, if desired.

•

ECONOMY MODE

The ATC system automatically maintains the interior

If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.

OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,

move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

2. Recirculation Control Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display

This display shows the temperature setting for the left

front seat occupant.

4. Mode Display

This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,

Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).

5. Blower Control Display

This display shows the current Blower speed selection.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel

1. A/C Button

6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display

Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning This display shows the temperature setting for the right

(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. front seat occupant.

Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch

7. Front Defrost Button

into manual mode.

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The 11. Blower Control

blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in-

selected.

creases as you move the control to the right from the

lowest blower setting. Performing this function will

cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button for warmer temperature set- 12. Climate Control OFF Button

tings.

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control

OFF

9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperature 13. Mode Control Button

control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi-

Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the

ATC to switch into manual mode.

10. Auto Temperature Control Button

Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and

the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and 14. SYNC Button

release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for Press and release to control the temperature setting for

more information. Performing this function will cause both zones from the driver temperature control.

the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic

modes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is

Provides the driver with independent temperature con- not necessary to change the settings. You will experience

trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.

the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to

function automatically.

16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature con- NOTE:

trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.

•

It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for

cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts

the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide

comfort as quickly as possible.

Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel.

•

The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric

units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable

feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features

(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the

system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front

passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired

temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and

automatically maintain that comfort level.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic

mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain

on low until the engine warms up. The blower will

increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Operation

selected. This allows the front occupants to control the

This system offers a full complement of manual override volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the

features. Auto mode.

NOTE: Each of these features operate independently The operator can also select the direction of the airflow

from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, by selecting one of the following positions.

temperature control will continue to operate automati-

cally.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.

There are seven fixed blower speeds.

Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to

Use the outer dial control to regulate direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets

the amount of air forced through the and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side

system in any mode you select. The to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off

blower speed increases as you move wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the

the control clockwise and decreases amount of airflow from these outlets.

when you move the control counter-

clockwise.

Blower Control

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by

adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now

operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are

outlets and defrost outlets.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL temperature settings for best windshield and side win-

mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the

outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

blower will automatically default to medium-high unless

the blower is controlled manually.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system

air is directed through the defrost and side window will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or

demister outlets.

ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually

selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window Air Conditioning (A/C)

demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator

snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning

while keeping the windshield clear.

system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool

temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air

outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C

button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and

deactivate the A/C system.

Defrost Mode

Air comes from the windshield and side window

demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and

•

If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.

can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these

active to prevent fogging of the windows. modes are selected.

•

If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, Operating Tips

select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.

Window Fogging

Recirculation Control

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on

pressing the RECIRCULATION control button. will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air

Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.

recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is

As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to

selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the

direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature

Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the

control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher

vehicle.

blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the

lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation DEFROST mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a Winter Operation

non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works When operating the system during the winter months,

very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other

Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

obstructions.

Summer Operation

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-

tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh

air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate

system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-

NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer

tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance

may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from

overheating during the high load condition.

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an pressor damage when the system is started again.

automatic recirculation system. When the system senses

a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial

Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips Chart

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Ⅵ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 346

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 346

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Ⅵ Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below 20°F Or Ϫ7°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Quadra-Trac I௡ Operating Instructions/

Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Quadra-Trac II௡ Operating Instructions/

Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Ⅵ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Ⅵ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

▫ Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

▫ Quadra-Drive௡ II System – If Equipped . . . . 359

Ⅵ Selec-Terrain™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range –

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 370

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Ⅵ Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Rain Brake Support – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 387

Ⅵ Multi-Displacement System (MDS)

▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel

Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed

(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 376

Transfer Case Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 378

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 378

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 379

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 381

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

▫ Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 387

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 394

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 395

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 396

Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 403 Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 411

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 412

▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 417

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 423

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 404

▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 405

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Ⅵ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Ⅵ Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

▫ E85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel

Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 429

▫ Trailer Towing Weights

(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 442

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ⅵ Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I௡

(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel

Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Ⅵ Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II௡ /

Quadra–Drive௡ II Four-Wheel

Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

▫ Towing This Vehicle

Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

STARTING PROCEDURES

CAUTION!

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the

inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if

present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat

belts.

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

•

Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine

is at idle speed.

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!

•

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in

the ignition switch. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

•

Automatic Transmission

Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes

before shifting into any driving gear.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the

accelerator pedal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Installing and Removing the ENGINE

Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START START/STOP Button

position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The

starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage

Installing the Button

automatically when the engine is running. If the engine 1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in

2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the

10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the

ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.

LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into

position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go

This feature allows the driver to oper- Removing the Button

ate the ignition switch with the push

of a button, as long as the ENGINE

START/STOP button is installed and

1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed

from the ignition switch for key fob use.

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- 2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the

mitter is in the passenger compart- chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the

ment.

button loose.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE

be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button

position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).

1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release

Normal Starting

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle

accelerator pedal.

speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine

will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in

the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the

button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift

lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP

button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will

display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine

will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the

PARK position, or it could roll.

To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or

NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-

ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system

takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle

fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after

10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine

prior to the engine starting, press the button again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in

PARK, the system will automatically time out after

30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the

OFF position.

•

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to

change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC

displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time

to change the ignition switch to the RUN position

(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),

Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot

OFF the Brake Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL

Position)

The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time

to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC

displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).

and START. To change the ignition switch positions Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F or Ϫ7°C)

without starting the vehicle and use the accessories To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

follow these steps.

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

•

Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

Clearing a Flooded Engine

(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold WeatherЉ proce-

dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press

and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor

will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then

disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal

and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

•

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into

the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to

start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire

causing serious personal injury.

•

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,

booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a

booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.

This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-

erly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

Clearing A Flooded Engine

(Using Fob With Integrated Key)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-

dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor The engine block heater cord is located:

will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this

•

3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil

dipstick tube.

occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then

repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector

harness.

CAUTION!

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one

hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-

onds before trying again.

WARNING!

After Starting

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits

quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a

standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with

grounded, three-wire extension cord.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

CAUTION!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,

the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and when your foot is

firmly on the brake pedal.

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

•

Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine

is at idle speed.

•

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK

prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch

when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Once

the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the

PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK

position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK

position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or

START position (engine running or not) and the brake

pedal must be pressed.

Gear Ranges

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold. If

there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the

ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.

Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after

restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to

the LOCK position first.

Five-Speed Automatic Transmission

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles/kilometers.

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply

the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift

lever into the PARK position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

NEUTRAL

WARNING!

This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-

longed periods with engine running. Engine may be

started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the

transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

•

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for

the parking brake. Always apply the parking

brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK

or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than

idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake

pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward

or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle

and hit someone or something. Only shift into

gear when the engine is idling normally and when

your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any

other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result

in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for

further information.

DRIVE

This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at

a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The

transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear.

The DRIVE position provides optimum driving charac-

teristics under all normal operating conditions.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only

after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

3.6L Engine

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-)

you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For

shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit example, if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear, when

the highest available gear. For example, if the driver you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the

shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the trans- transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the dis-

mission will never shift above third gear, but can shift play will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the

down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.

transmission into third gear.

NOTE:

5.7L Engine

•

If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left On vehicles equipped with the 5.7L engine, use of ERS (or

(-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional under-

that can be attained without overrevving the engine. drive gear which is not normally used during through-

The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and gear accelerations. This additional gear improves vehicle

will limit the top gear to the one displayed.

performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer

on certain grades. ERS 1, 2, and 3 are underdrive gears;

ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive) is the same as the

normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE position in first

through fourth gear, the first tap to the left (-) will display

•

If you push and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the

right (+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting

mode and shift to the appropriate gear. The display

will read ЉDЉ.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

the ERS designation for the current gear (the transmis-

sion will not downshift). For example, if you are in

DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the

shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4

(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift

the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive

gear). When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear, the first

tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and

display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear).

Another tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission

down to ERS 4 (direct gear).

Screen Display

Actual Gear(s) Allowed

1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5

* Applies to vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines only.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum

deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the

left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to

the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed

down.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically

controlled Overdrive (fifth gear for 3.6L engine, fourth

and fifth gears for 5.7L engine). The transmission will

automatically shift to Overdrive, if the following condi-

tions are present:

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid.

•

the shift lever is in DRIVE;

the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-

perature;

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the

(48 km/h);

transmission will automatically select the most desirable

gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission

temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION

•

the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;

transmission has reached normal operating OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmis-

temperature.

sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis-

sion cools down. After cool down, the transmission will

resume normal operation.

NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-

peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive

and will automatically select the most desirable gear for The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the

operation at this temperature. Normal operation will most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully

resume when the transmission fluid temperature has pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph

risen to a suitable level. Refer to the “Note” under (56 km/h).

“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.

When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode – If Equipped

During cold temperature operation you may notice de- When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a

layed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-

temperature. This feature improves the warm-up time of curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve

the engine and transmission.

performance and reduce the potential for transmission

overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,

shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled the switch must be pressed each time the engine is

under steady cruise conditions.

started.

In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine

speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by

a downshift, may occur. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator

Light” will turn off. This is a normal part of the overheat

protection strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL

mode.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-

tions. If a condition is detected that could result in

transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home

Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission

will remain in the current gear (3.6L engine) or in direct

gear (5.7L engine) until the vehicle is brought to a stop.

TOW/HAUL Switch

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the

instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been

activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at

higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may re-

sult in a slightly different feeling or response during

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.

3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en- normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed

gine.

drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,

the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.

5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.

NOTE:

If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will

return to normal operation. If the problem persists,

PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-

ate. Only second gear (3.6L engine) or third gear (5.7L

engine) will be available in the DRIVE position. Have the

transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

•

The torque converter clutch may not engage until the

transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-

ally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].

Because the engine speed is higher when the torque

converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the

transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.

This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift

control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission Rocking the Vehicle

is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can

with 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive gears), often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever

the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight

gear (normal fifth gear) until the transmission fluid pressure to the accelerator.

and engine coolant are warm.

NOTE: The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Trac-

•

If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the tion Control System (TCS) (if equipped) should be turned

first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans- OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to

mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting and Op-

fluid partially draining from the torque converter into erating” for further information.

the transmission. This condition is normal and will not

cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-

verter will refill within five seconds after starting the

engine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or

Quadra-Trac Iா Operating Instructions/

racing the engine, is most effective. Racing the engine or

Precautions – If Equipped

spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheat-

The Quadra-Trac I௡ is a single-speed (HI range only)

ing and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift

transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-

lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five

wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake

rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating

Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard

and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-

ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any

longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer

to wheels with traction.

CAUTION!

NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I௡ system is not appropriate

for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.

Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Oper-

ating” for further information.

When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between

“First” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster

than 15 mph (24 km/h) or drivetrain damage may

result.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

Quadra-Trac IIா Operating Instructions/

Precautions – If Equipped

The Quadra-Trac II௡ transfer case is fully automatic in the

•

NEUTRAL

4WD LOW

normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II௡ This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.

transfer case provides three mode positions:

When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW

position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts

together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for

loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD

LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause

increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI

position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed

the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Transfer Case Switch

•

4WD HI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends Shift Positions

on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and

cause damage to the transfer case.

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

4WD AUTO

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,

sand, and dry hard pavement.

NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain௡ – If Equipped” in “Start-

ing and Operating” for further information on the vari-

ous positions and their intended usages.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N

(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move

regardless of the transmission position. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

NEUTRAL

This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts

from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”

in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

4WD LOW

This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It locks the

front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. It provides

additional traction and maximum pulling power for

loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain௡ – If Equipped” for

further information on the various positions and their

intended usages.

Shifting Procedures

4WD HI to 4WD LOW

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the

ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the

“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The

“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster

will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is

complete.

Transfer Case Switch

NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a

transfer case motor temperature protection condition ex-

ists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put

Trans in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

4WD LOW to 4WD HI

occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-

erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for

clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.

The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to

3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster

than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow

the shift.

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the

ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the

“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The

“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster

will flash and go out when the shift is complete.

NOTE:

NEUTRAL Shift Procedure

•

If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer

case motor temperature protection condition exists, a

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.

“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans 2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.

in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in 4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch

information.

starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light will

stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is

complete. A “To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift

Procedure in Owners Manual” message will display on

•

Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the

vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic

formation.

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Quadra-Driveா II System – If Equipped

The optional Quadra-Drive௡ II System features two

torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an

Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and

the Quadra-Trac II௡ transfer case. The optional ELSD axle

is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate.

Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a

standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and

right wheels. With a traction difference between left and

right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference.

As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque

will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less

traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer

Neutral Switch

5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is

similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II௡ transfer case shifting

information, preceding this section, for shifting this

system.

SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED

Description

Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle

control systems, along with driver input, to provide the

best performance for all terrains.

Selec-Terrain™ Switch

Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:

•

Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Only avail-

able in 4WD High range. Performance based tuning

that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with im-

proved handling and acceleration over a two-wheel

drive vehicle. The Electronic Stability Control will set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintain-

ing safe handling controls. The vehicle will lower (if

equipped with Air Suspension) to Aero Mode in High

Range. 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode, if

4WD Low is selected the Selec-Terrain™ will auto-

matically switch back to AUTO.

traction with seamless steering feel to provide im-

proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel

drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the

level will change to NRH.

•

Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use on low

traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.

Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding

may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic

brake controls are set to limit traction control manage-

ment of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air

suspension, the level will change to Off-Road 1.

•

Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement

weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces

such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on

certain operating conditions), the transmission may

use second gear (rather than first gear) during

launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped

with air suspension, the level will change to Normal

Ride Height (NRH) if the transfer case is in high range.

The level will change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case

is in Low range.

Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD

Low range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air

Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction

based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on

high traction off-road surfaces. Activates the Hill De-

scent Control for steep downhill control. Use for low

speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If

Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive

operation can be used on and off road. Balances

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will

change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in

ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from

4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system

will return to AUTO.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

Selec-Terrain™ Switch

1 — Up Button

2 — Down Button

QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED

3 — Park Mode Indicator Lamp

4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp

5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp

6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp

Description

The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full

time load leveling capability along with the benefit of

being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a

button.

•

Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard

position of the suspension and is meant for normal

driving.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

•

Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately

1.3 in (33 mm) – This position should be the default

position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A

smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Press

the “Up” button once from the NRH position while the

vehicle speed is below 48 mph (77 km/h). When in the

OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between

40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater

than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph

(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered

to NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting

and Operating” for further information.

the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to

OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting

and Operating” for further information.

•

Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.5 in

(13 mm) – This position provides improved aerody-

namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will

automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle

speed remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and 66 mph

(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will

return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed

remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph

(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will

enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the

Selec-Terrain™ knob is turned to the “SPORT” posi-

tion. Turning the Selec-Terrain™ knob to the “AUTO”

position will return the system to normal operation.

Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately

2.6 in (65 mm) – This position is intended for off-

roading use only where maximum ground clearance is

required. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice

from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position

while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While

in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Park Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.5 in air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in

(38 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier “Starting and Operating” for further information.

passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of

The system requires that the engine be running for all

the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo.

changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,

To enter Park Mode, press the “Down” button once

including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened

while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).

at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will

Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h)

not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.

the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle

speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting

(40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from

speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Park Mode incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising

change will be cancelled. To exit Park Mode, press the the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and

“Up” button once while in Park Mode or drive the then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will

vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).

move down first and then the rear.

The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the

vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The

Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure

the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the a proper appearance.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

suspension system has a feature which allows the auto- Display Messages

matic leveling to be disabled. Press and hold both the When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

“Up” and “Down” buttons simultaneously between 5 and appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

10 seconds, a message will appear in the EVIC stating Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your

leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons Instrument Panel” for further information.

have been released. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error

tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

has been detected.

Panel” for further information. Driving the vehicle over

5 mph (8 km/h) will return the air suspension to normal Operation

operation. Refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” in “What The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show

To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator

lamps will show a position which the system is working

to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are

flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indica-

tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the

ЉUpЉ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi-

tion the system is working to achieve.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure

volume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-

sonal injury or damage to the system, see your

authorized dealer for service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle

one position higher from the current position, assuming speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps

all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic

threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple changes and user requested changes.

times, each press will raise the requested level by one

•

Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.

position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest

position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle

speed, etc).

Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.

Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the sus-

pension one position lower from the current level, as-

suming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors

closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button

can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the

requested level by one position down to a minimum of

Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on

current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

•

Park Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

when the vehicle is in Park Mode. If Park Mode is Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a

requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph narrower track to make them capable of performing in a

(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design

will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than

the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If ordinary cars.

vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better

(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator

view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.

lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which

They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during the

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than

height change to Park Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds

low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-

15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be paused

rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp

until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph

turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this

(24 km/h) and the height change continues to Park

type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle

loss of control or vehicle rollover.

height will return to NRH. Park Mode may be selected

while the vehicle is not moving provided that the

engine is still running and all doors remain closed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped

When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest

useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle

or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be

raised as required by the changes in terrain.

NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air

dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to

the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners

and can be removed by hand.

The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the

vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-

Terrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be

changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™

mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer

to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper-

ating” for further information.

When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If Equipped

When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional

traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-

tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional

low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in

excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in

4WD LOW range.

Front Air Dam

1 — Front Bumper

2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

Driving Through Water

Driving through water more than

few inches/

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

water, there are a number of precautions that must be safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must

considered before entering the water.

drive through water, try to determine the depth and the

bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to

entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady

controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water

to minimize wave effects.

NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to

20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or

streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehi-

cle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to

switch the system into recirculation mode during water Flowing Water

fording. If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm

run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes

and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross

flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm).

The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your

vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)

that are downstream of your entry point to allow for

drifting.

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,

as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-

ing through water may cause damage that may not be

covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

Standing Water

lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction

(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize will be lost.

wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-

water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of

control.

Maintenance

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle

fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,

Hill Climbing

transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami- NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the

nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.

should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre-

Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a

vent component damage.

lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use

first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional

control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low

gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and

Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a

If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while

climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop

and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,

and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,

allowing the compression braking of the engine to help

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control Traction Downhill

vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer

skidding the tires.

case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly

down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine

compression drag. This will permit you to control the

vehicle speed and direction.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or

cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,

never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in

tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care-

fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never

back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking

can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid

repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-

sion whenever possible.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always

drive straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a

hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion

by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a

fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide

traction to complete the climb.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

•

Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

•

If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

•

Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

POWER STEERING

After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

3.6L Engine

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power

steering system that will give you good vehicle response

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under-

The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” mes-

hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that

sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it

prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the

indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have

system will provide mechanical steering capability.

occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in

the power steering system. You will lose power steering

assistance momentarily until the over temperature con-

CAUTION!

dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,

then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments

until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-

cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering

assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.

Normal operation will resume once the system is

allowed to cool.

NOTE:

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”

message and a flashing icon are displayed on

the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle

needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is

likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer

•

Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-

tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under

these conditions there will be a substantial increase in

steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds

and during parking maneuvers.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

•

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-

ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it

does not in any way damage the steering system.

5.7L Engine

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering

assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

CAUTION!

NOTE:

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.

•

Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

Power Steering Fluid Check

WARNING!

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

CAUTION!

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering

system as the chemicals can damage your power

steering components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)

(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting

off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load

and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no

driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return

to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the

PARK position.

Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in

the instrument cluster will illuminate.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the

park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To

release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a

second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake

disengage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

NOTE:

WARNING!

•

When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-

sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will

flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound

to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake

before attempting to move the vehicle.

•

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for

the parking brake. Always apply the parking

brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured.

Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A

child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

•

This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-

plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The

parking brake should always be applied whenever the

driver is not in the vehicle.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNING! (Continued)

Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage

or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission

in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to

roll and cause damage or injury.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic

brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake

Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),

and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these

systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and

control in various driving conditions.

•

CAUTION!

Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control

(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential

(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, Rain Brake Support and, if it

has four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed trans-

fer case, Hill Descent Control (HDC).

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the

parking brake released, a brake system malfunction

is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an

authorized dealer immediately.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control

under adverse braking conditions. The system controls

hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and

help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip

differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven

axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than

the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains

active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this

section for further information.

WARNING!

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The

ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-

sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-

bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which

could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also

reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift

will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers.

WARNING!

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The

BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-

sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-

bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which

could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring

during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot

prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road

conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or

other vehicles.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the

user’s safety or the safety of others.

•

Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes

active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) or

and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

WARNING!

This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH

range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the

vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is

shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to

4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”

mode. This mode should be used for most driving

situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”

mode for specific reasons as noted below.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-

lisions, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s

safety or the safety of others.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC

OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS

portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in

the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability

features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended

The ESC system has two available operating modes in

4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one

operating mode in 4WD LOW range.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor- with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or

mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”

again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the

will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial

Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen-

tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done

while the vehicle is in motion.

4WD Low Range

Partial Off

This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW

range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW

range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from

4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the

ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.

ESC OFF Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

WARNING!

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-

sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate

actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may

reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-

priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC

will become active automatically once an excessively

swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-

quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from

swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and

follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer

to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for

further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the

engine power may be reduced and you may feel the

brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to

stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the

ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle

down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the

trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when

starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain

the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short

period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the

brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle

during this short period of time, the system will release

brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The

system will release brake pressure in proportion to the

amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in

the intended direction of travel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

WARNING!

There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than

8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,

when the system will not activate and slight rolling

may occur. This could cause a collision with another

vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is

responsible for braking the vehicle.

•

Vehicle must be stopped.

Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or

greater hill.

•

Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,

vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-

ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when

the activation criteria have been met. The system will not

activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing With HSA

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade

when pulling a trailer.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle

on a hill without putting the transmission in

PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll

down the hill and could cause a collision with

another vehicle or object. Always remember to use

the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that

the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

WARNING!

•

If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and

deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the

brake pedal is released, there may not be enough

brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a

hill and this could cause a collision with another

vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid

rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,

manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-

ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver

is responsible for braking the vehicle.

HSA Off

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done

using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only

reach full braking during emergency braking situations. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills

It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may during off-road driving situations and is available in 4WD

occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by LOW range only. To enable HDC, press the HDC switch

the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly, or put the Selec-Terrain™ system in “ROCK” mode

Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake (“ROCK” mode is only available in 4WD LOW range).

pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the

driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow

a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.

Rain Brake Support – If Equipped

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance

in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small

amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup

on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the

windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not

function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake

Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and

no driver interaction is required.

Hill Descent Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

When HDC is enabled, the HDC icon will be illuminated HDC Operation in 4WD Low Range

in the instrument cluster. HDC will automatically apply To enable HDC, press the HDC switch or put the

the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level Selec-Terrain™ system in the “ROCK” mode. The HDC

when necessary on grades greater than approximately icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and

8%. It will usually not activate on level ground.

HDC will function. If the vehicle speed goes above

20 mph (32 km/h), the HDC icon will flash and HDC will

not function. To disable HDC, press the HDC switch.

The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the

driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the trans-

mission gear selected.

4WD Low Range Set Speeds

HDC operation can be overridden with brake application

to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.

Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,

the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the

usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is

released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi-

nal set speed.

•

1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)

4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)

5th or D (Drive) = 7.5 mph (12 km/h)

REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

•

PARK = HDC will not function

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and

ESC OFF Indicator Light

HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.

At vehicle speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC will no

longer function. When the vehicle speed drops below

20 mph (32 km/h), HDC function will automatically

resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set

speed.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should turn off with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver

must remain attentive to the driving conditions and

is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

Tire Markings

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

•

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

•

Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the 2 — Size Designation

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

3 — Service Description

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

NOTE:

•

LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

•

P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

•

European-Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact

spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T = Temporary spare tire

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

— ЉRЉ means radial construction

—ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding

to its load index under certain operating conditions

— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire

Light Load = Light load tire

C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for

this tire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001

— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the

year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Term

Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located

between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running

from the sill to the roof.

Cold Tire Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the

vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation

pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or

KPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold

tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is

molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as

shown on the tire placard.

A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the

vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the

recommended inflation pressure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed

on the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

This placard tells you important information about

the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) total weight your vehicle can carry

3) tire size designed for your vehicle

4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section

of this manual.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”

on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

•

The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities

of your vehicle with varying seating configurations

and number and size of occupants. This table is for

illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for

the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five

150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs

[295 kg]).

•

For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

•

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-

sult in over-heating and tire failure.

Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting

in loss of vehicle control.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary

areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of

sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-

hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to

the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-

able steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side “B” Pillar.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear

patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal

wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for

earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases

tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel

consumption.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as

inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least

once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the winter.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage it.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is

defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been

driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation

pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-

sure molded into the tire sidewall.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

Radial-Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine

them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your

authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle at or above

maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on

your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and

Wheel – If Equipped

CAUTION!

The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and

function as the original equipment tire and wheel found

on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire

may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your

vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original

equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire

rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in

“Starting and Operating” for further information.

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare

installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on

the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”

or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-

ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-

rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your

vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used

only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped

with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-

rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Do not install more than one non-matching temporary

use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do

not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on

the vehicle at any given time

WARNING!

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

first opportunity.

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)

the original equipment tire at the first opportunity

and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could

result in loss of vehicle control.

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let

anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the

speed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

Tread Wear Indicators

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the

replaced.

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon various

factors including but not limited to:

•

Driving style

Tire pressure

Distance driven

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

Replacement Tires

WARNING!

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information” placard for the size designation of your

tires. The service description and load identification will

be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use

equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the

safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend

that you contact your original equipment or an autho-

rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire

specifications or capability.

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have an collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

•

Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity than what was originally equipped on

your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index

could result in tire overloading and failure. You

could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage.

•

Install on Rear Tires Only

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Due to limited clearance, use SAE class “S” low profile

cables or traction devices only. Security Chain Com-

pany (SCC) Super Z6 #SZ 441 cables or equivalent are

recommended.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it is

important that only traction devices in good con-

dition are used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise

occurs that could indicate device breakage. Re-

move the damaged parts of the device before

further use.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

Install device as tightly as possible and then

retighten after driving about ⁄2 mile (0.8 km).

CAUTION!

•

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-

ment.

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

(Continued)

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Observe the traction device manufacturer’s in-

structions on the method of installation, operating

speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the winter. All season tires satisfy this require-

ment and can be indicated by the M+S designation on the

tire sidewall.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, handling,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and

type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only

in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road

type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-

tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to

a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-

sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual

wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-

formed.

Tire Rotation

NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will

automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn

the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle

recommended cold tire pressure.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”

shown in the following diagram.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about

1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure

three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informa- Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up-

tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may

how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is (24 km/h) to receive this information.

normal and there should be no adjustment for this

For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold

increased pressure.

(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and

the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-

threshold for any reason, including low temperature ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to

effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is

sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause

the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),

but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been

inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure

value.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Sensor.

CAUTION!

•

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have

been established for the tire size equipped on your

vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement

equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or

style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-

age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance

beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as

damage to the sensors may result.

NOTE:

•

The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

•

The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

•

The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- The TPMS consists of the following components:

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

•

Receiver Module

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light.

Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning message to

appear, or the chime to sound.

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW

PRESSURE” message will display in the instru-

ment cluster for 5 seconds, and an audible chime will be

activated, when one or more of the four active road tire

pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as

soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s

check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain recommended cold placard pressure value. The system

the proper pressure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor- 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

ing Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire that affects radio wave signals.

pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to

housings.

receive this information.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM

NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in

SYSTEM” message may be displayed for approximately

the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the

5 seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime

tire pressure. If you install the spare tire, in place of a

will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence

road tire, that has a pressure below the low-pressure

will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The

warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when

chime will sound, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message

the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can

will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds,

occur by any of the following:

and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

sensors.

Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

on solid. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes- Premium System – If Equipped

sage will be displayed for 75 seconds. For each subse- The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

quent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a “SER- technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to

VICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

75 seconds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain readings to the Receiver Module.

on solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly

and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the

check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain

TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure

the proper pressure.

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire

pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the

of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be following components:

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

•

Receiver Module

order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-

dible chime will be activated, when one or more of

the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the

EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages

(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a

minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the

pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units

in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units

active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic

display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.

The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-

play of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish

once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a

system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This

no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“

Light will no longer flash, the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ

in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire

Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

message will not be present, and a pressure value will be ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message is then followed by a

displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This

any of the following:

indicates the pressure values are still being received from

the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the

correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs

to be serviced as long as the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ

message exists.

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM

sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in

the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road

housings.

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”

pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the

vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and

off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,

The EVIC will also display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ

message for a minimum of five seconds when a system

fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compo-

nent an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ mes- General Information

sage for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and

place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure following conditions:

Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

onds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display

a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message for three seconds

and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure

value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,

and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the

TPMS will update automatically.

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the

following licenses:

In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a

new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no

tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to

be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)

in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is

not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over

regular gasoline in these engines.

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emis-

sions regulations and provide excellent Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

fuel economy and performance when us- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso- high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is

line having an octane rating of 87. The use required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

of premium gasoline is not recommended, as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-

as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline

these engines.

before considering service for the vehicle.

5.7L Engine

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and

This engine is designed to meet all emis- endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-

sions regulations and provide satisfactory wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties

fuel economy and performance when us- necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,

ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-

an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac- mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-

turer recommends the use of 89 octane for fications if they are available.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

Reformulated Gasoline

CAUTION!

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these

blends may result in starting and driveability prob-

lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause

emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or

cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-

nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a

fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-

vide excellent performance and durability of engine and

fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Problems that result from using gasoline containing

Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may

not be covered under warranty.

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates

may be used in your vehicle.

E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-

ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol

content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 MMT In Gasoline

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

•

operate in a lean mode

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

poor engine performance

poor cold start and cold driveability

increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

E85 perform the following:

the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to

look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT

can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the

United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-

nia reformulated gasoline.

•

change the engine oil and oil filter

disconnect and reconnect the battery

drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged

exposure to E85 fuel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

Materials Added to Fuel

CAUTION! (Continued)

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to

contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional

detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and they would result in additional cost.

Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the

fuel.

•

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate

service. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentra-

tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle

performance problems resulting from the use of

such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of

the manufacturer.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

•

The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-

mance and damage the emissions control system.

(Continued)

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-

trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper

maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected

every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-

mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,

drive with all side windows fully open.

Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle

to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous

exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

•

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —

IF EQUIPPED

E85 General Information

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-

hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique

fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or Un-

leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those

subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

the other sections of this manual for information on

features that are common between Flexible Fuel and

gasoline-only powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can

operate on E85.

E85 Fuel Cap

E85 Badge

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ethanol Fuel (E85)

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and

15% unleaded gasoline.

•

you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less

than 1/4 full

WARNING!

you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when

refueling

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-

ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-

ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the

tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never

use it near an open flame.

you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for

a period of at least 5 minutes

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard

starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability

during warm up.

NOTE:

Fuel Requirements

•

When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),

you may experience hard starting and rough idle

following start up even if the above recommendations

are followed.

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with

an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of

these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that

alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be

avoided.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

•

Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully Starting

compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use

engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an

additive, such as MOPAR௡ Injector Cleanup or increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and

Techron may be used.

a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)

until the engine is fully warmed up.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is

FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu- beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera-

lated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).

in MOPAR௡ engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting

Cruising Range

Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer re-

Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter

quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the

than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel

requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395

consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon

contains additional requirements, developed during ex-

(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease

tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to

by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR௡ or an

equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

Replacement Parts

ADDING FUEL

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are

designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure

that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-

patible parts.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,

on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or

damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this

vehicle.

CAUTION!

1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under

the headlamp switch).

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol

compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your

vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and

may affect driveability.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

Fuel Filler Cap

2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler

cap.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

•

Damage to the fuel system or emission control

•

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near

the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the

tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-

tions and may cause the malfunction indicator

light to turn on.

system could result from using an improper fuel

cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-

rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting

aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors

escaping from the system.

•

A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn

on.

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

•

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

NOTE:

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

•

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator

will display in the EVIC telltale display area.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

•

Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you

hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is

properly tightened.

•

If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press

come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the

the vehicle is refueled.

problem continues, the message will appear the next time

the vehicle is started.

Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel

filler door emergency release.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

1. Open the liftgate.

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.

2. Remove the left rear storage bin cover.

3. Pull the release cable.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

included on this label and indicates the month, day, and and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo

hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer components, sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxi- creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve-

mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). hicle’s GVWR.

Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear

GAWR are not exceeded.

Tire Size

The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on

Payload

your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load capacity of this tire size.

weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including

the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and

cargo.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

Inflation Pressure

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle

should then be determined separately to be sure that the

load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.

Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either

the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total

load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be

shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate

until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the

heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is

distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before

driving.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way

the brakes operate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of

your vehicle.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for

further information.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its Љloaded and

ready for operationЉ condition.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements

and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-

hicles used for trailer towing.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

WARNING!

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-

tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or

more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing

hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If

you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.

WARNING!

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)

allowance for the presence of a driver.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)

Weight-Distributing Hitch

The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying

by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically

or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight

this as part of the load on your vehicle.

to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).

When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direc-

tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more

consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing

towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway

control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for

hitches are the most popular on the market today and heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required

they are commonly used to tow small- and medium- depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading

sized trailers.

to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)

requirements.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

WARNING!

•

An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, and brak-

ing performance, and could result in a collision.

Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be

compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult

with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a

reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi-

tional information.

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)

Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing

Hitch (Incorrect)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

Trailer Hitch Classification

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of

trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the

optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized

dealer for package content.

Class

Max. Trailer Hitch Industry

Standards

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - Medium

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your

given drivetrain.

Class III - Heavy Duty

Class IV - Extra

Heavy Duty

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given

drivetrain.

5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on

your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/

Model

GCWR (Gross Com-

bined Wt. Rating)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer Tongue

Wt. (See Note)

3.6L

5.7L

4x2

4x4

4x2

4x4

8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)

13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)

500 lbs (227 kg)

740 lbs (336 kg)

720 lbs (327 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and

cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to

“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The addition of passengers

and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo

(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs

(1 678 kg).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the

rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side

which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.

Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of

many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum

tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:

•

The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.

The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

•

The weight of the driver and all passengers.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed

options, must be considered as part of the total load on

your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and

Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operat-

ing” for further information.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.

This helps the engine and other parts of the

vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Towing Requirements

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance

Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the

proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,

never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-

train components, the following guidelines are recom-

mended.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

•

Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,

axle or other parts could be damaged.

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When trailering

cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts

can occur that may be difficult for the driver to

control. You could lose control of your vehicle and

have a collision.

•

Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission

in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure

the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,

block or ؆chock؆ the trailer wheels.

•

When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure or tires.

Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough

slack for turning corners.

•

GCWR must not be exceeded.

Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch

utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to

always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue

weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements – Tires

replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher

load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s

GVWR and GAWR limits.

−

Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes

−

Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

−

Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

−

Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

−

An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically-

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper

inspection procedure.

−

Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

−

When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-

ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result

in a collision.

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

WARNING!

•

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have

brakes when you need them and could have a

collision.

The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven–pin connector

at the rear of the vehicle and a four-pin harness located

under the rear bumper. The four-pin harness must be

unclipped before use. Use a factory-approved trailer

harness and connector.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

5 — Ground

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

Towing Tips

The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes

and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Sched-

traffic.

ule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Automatic Transmission

NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How- (5.7L engine).

ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped

TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,

should be selected.

−

Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or

selecting a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) feature) while operating the vehicle under

heavy operating conditions, will improve performance

and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-

ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better

engine braking.

When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

−

Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

Cooling System

SNOW PLOW

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment

heating, take the following actions:

should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The

airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the

front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-

edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.

−

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

WARNING!

−

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other

aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.

This could adversely affect the functioning of the

airbag system and you could be injured.

−

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition

Wheel OFF the Two-Wheel Drive

Four-Wheel Drive Models

Ground

Models

See Instructions

•

Transmission in PARK

Flat Tow

NONE

NOT ALLOWED

Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)

Tow in forward direction

NOT ALLOWED

Front

Rear

ALL

NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

On Trailer

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be lowered to the “Park” (lowest) level, and have automatic

leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift™

– If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the “Park”

level (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to

follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down tension.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

will result.

7. Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is away from the battery post.

allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle

trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will

cause severe transmission damage. Damage from

improper towing is not covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in

PARK.

Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac Iா

(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive

Models

Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do

not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.

4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or

vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the

ground.

CAUTION!

•

Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.

Internal damage to the transmission or transfer

case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used

when recreational towing.

Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this

vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the

transfer case.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer

case damage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

•

The transmission must be placed in PARK for

recreational towing.

Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac IIா

Before recreational towing, perform the procedure

outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to

be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-

TRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.

Failure to follow these procedures can cause se-

vere transmission and/or transfer case damage.

/Quadra–Driveா II Four-Wheel Drive Models

The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and

the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational

towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to

the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of

transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the

selector switch in any mode position.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

recreational towing.

CAUTION! (Continued)

Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar

on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be

damaged.

•

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that

the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before

recreational towing to prevent damage to internal

parts.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging

the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)

position disengages both the front and rear drive-

shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle

to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The

parking brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the

transmission to PARK.

2. Turn OFF the ignition.

3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, remove the

Keyless Enter-N-Go button and use the key fob to

complete this procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures/

Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for

further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but

do not start the engine.

5. Press and hold the brake pedal.

6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,

press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)

button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,

until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,

indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking

(stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.

A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” mes-

sage will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Neutral Switch

8. Start the engine.

9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure

that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in

the unlocked OFF position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

12. Firmly apply the parking brake.

continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and

the shift has been completed. If any of these require-

ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N)

button or are no longer met during the four second

timer, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash

continuously until all requirements are met or until the

NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

13. Shift the transmission into PARK.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-

mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in

NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the

transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine

is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable

tow bar.

A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

15. Release the parking brake.

16. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it

away from the negative battery post.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

normal usage.

NOTE:

•

Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met

prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer

nected to the tow vehicle.

be displayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information

Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.

4. Turn the key fob to the LOCK/OFF position (if it has

been moved or the engine has been started).

5. Turn the key fob to the ON/RUN position, but do not

start the engine.

6. Press and hold the brake pedal.

7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

8. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,

press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)

button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,

until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,

indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking

(go out) when shift is complete. The “FOUR WHEEL

Neutral Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE:

(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid

gear clash.

•

Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met

prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must

continue to be met until the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements are not met prior to

pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer

met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light

will flash continuously until all requirements are met

or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

10. Release the brake pedal.

11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

12. Start the engine.

13. Press and hold the brake pedal.

14. Release the parking brake.

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake

pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

16. The Keyless Enter-N-Go button (if equipped) may

now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting

Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Oper-

ating” for further information.

A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Ⅵ Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Ⅵ If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Ⅵ Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Ⅵ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 472

▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Ⅵ Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . 475

▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

switch bank just above the climate controls.

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional

turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

•

On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission

in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle

speed.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

•

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher

may wear down your battery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461

•

You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT

(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous

chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

•

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location

The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located

in rear cargo area, below the load floor.

WARNING! (Continued)

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack.

•

Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,

take it to a service center where it can be raised on

a lift.

The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Storage Location

Spare Tire Stowage

The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear

cargo area.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463

Preparations for Jacking

6. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-

ing position. For example, if changing

the right front tire, block the left rear

wheel.

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or

slippery surfaces.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

7. For vehicle equipped with Quadra-Lift௡ refer to

“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting and Operat-

ing” for further information on disabling automatic

leveling.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking Instructions

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

•

Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

Only use the jack in the positions indicated and

for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

•

Always park on a firm, level surface as far from

the edge of the roadway as possible before raising

the vehicle.

•

Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

•

Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

•

Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

(Continued)

Jack Warning Label

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by

turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still

on the ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.

Jack and Tool Assembly

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. For the front axle, place the jack and protective cap on 5. For the rear axle, place the jack and protective cap in

the body flange just behind the front tire Do not raise the the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the

vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

rear tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the

jack is fully engaged.

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467

6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.

Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface

and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.

Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle

has been lowered.

WARNING!

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-

clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the

wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate

nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct

wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt

about the correct tightness, have them checked with a

torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service

station.

7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install

the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.

Lightly tighten the nuts.

11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return

it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

12. Securely store the road wheel and jack in the cargo 13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as

area.

soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack

and tool kit.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided.

JUMP-STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

Stowed Spare

NOTE: The compact spare rests on a foam donut to raise

the wheel face off the storage area floor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump-Start

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen-

precautions.

ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under

the hood to assist in jump-starting.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Remote Battery Posts

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)

2 — Remote Negative (-) Post

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive

(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.

WARNING!

•

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is on. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

•

Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or

bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical

contact. You could be seriously injured.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-

sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-

plosion.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the

discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark

could cause the battery to explode and could result in

personal injury.

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start

the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in

the reverse sequence:

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the

remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with

the discharged battery.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable

from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be

vehicle.

one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the

vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side

of the vehicle.

10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi-

tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use

both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of

damage to the vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

•

Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck

vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury

or death.

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow

hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing

serious injury.

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,

even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).

Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s

battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery

life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473

4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove

the shift lever override access cover, located on the

bottom of the cupholder.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a

vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for

tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could

damage your vehicle.

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold

the shift lock lever down.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

7. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.

8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and

install the rubber liner into the cupholder.

1. Firmly set the parking brake.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position

without starting the engine.

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans-

mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles

may also be towed as described under “Recreational

Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.

3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located

next to the shifter on the center console).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be be lowered to the Park level (for example, engine will not

lowered to the Park (lowest) level, and have automatic run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the

leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause

body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section on fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down

Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle cannot tension.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF

the Ground

2WD Models

4WD Models

See instructions in “Recreational Tow-

ing” under “Starting and Operating”

If transmission is operable:

Trans in NEUTRAL

•

Trans in PARK

•

Flat Tow

NONE

•

T/case in NEUTRAL

30 mph max(48 km/h)

Tow in forward direction

NOT ALLOWED

BEST METHOD

15 miles (24 km) max distance

Front

Rear

ALL

Wheel Lift or Dolly

Tow

Flatbed

BEST METHOD

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to

vehicles under tow must be observed.

CAUTION!

•

Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when

towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed

truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension

components. Damage to your vehicle may result

from improper towing.

If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the

ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,

not in the LOCK position.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.

Towing Without the Ignition Key Fob

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see Brake/

Transmission Interlock Manual Override (under Starting

and Operating, Automatic Transmission) for instructions

on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK

position for towing.

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-

proved method of towing without the ignition key is

with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-

sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Two-Wheel Drive Models

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than

all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the

ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a

flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift

or towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-

sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear

wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-

TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the

distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).

CAUTION!

Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than

15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can

cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-

age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

CAUTION!

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the

vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and

the opposite end on a towing dolly.

•

Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.

Internal damage to the transmission or transfer

case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used

when towing.

Failure to follow these towing methods could

result in damage to the transmission and/or trans-

fer case. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer

case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the

forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF

the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is

in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting

and Operating” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Engine Compartment – 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Ⅵ Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 483

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 483

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 525

▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 528

Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 517

Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Ⅵ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

Ⅵ Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Ⅵ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 531

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.6L

1 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick

6 — Air Cleaner Filter

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

3 — Engine Oil Fill

8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)

9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L

1 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick

3 — Engine Oil Fill

6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

7 — Engine Oil Dipstick

8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)

9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

5 — Air Cleaner Filter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II

CAUTION!

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

•

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The

vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator

will display in the EVIC telltale display area.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

the vehicle is started.

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,

which you can use prior to going to the test station. To

check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must

do the following:

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not

crank or start the engine.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start

this test over.

3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of

a normal bulb check.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

happen:

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

not proceed to the I/M station.

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system

is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR௡ parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR௡ parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

DEALER SERVICE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.

available which include detailed service information for

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

maintenance schedule, there are other components which

attempting any procedure yourself.

may require servicing or replacement in the future.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

CAUTION!

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

•

Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC

dealership or qualified repair center.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the

engine after it has sat overnight.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of

your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance

intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these

components as the chemicals can damage your

engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-

tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed

because of component malfunction, use only the

specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart

(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE

range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE

range.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage

your engine.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Change Engine Oil

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,

whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection for all

engines under all types of operating conditions, the

manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-

tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material

Standard MS-6395.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489

Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on

temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

starting and vehicle fuel economy.

ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper

ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).

tion.

Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and

Operating” for further information.

Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certi-

ber, should not be used.

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber, should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating Synthetic Engine Oils

temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil

starting and vehicle fuel economy.

quality requirements are met, and the recommended

maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are

followed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Materials Added to Engine Oils

Engine Oil Filter

Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an at every oil change.

engineered product and its performance may be im-

paired by supplemental additives.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, high-quality filters should be used to assure most effi-

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the cient service. MOPAR௡ engine oil filters are high-quality

environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser- oil filters and are recommended.

vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how

and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

in your area.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

maintenance intervals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491

Maintenance-Free Battery

WARNING!

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

WARNING!

•

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies

considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to

assure most efficient service. MOPAR௡ engine air cleaner

filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

•

Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

•

It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-

tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in

the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables

before connecting the charger to the battery. Do

not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493

Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING!

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this

time.

•

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause

the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced repairman.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System

Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-

sor Oil, and Refrigerants.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

hood latching components to ensure proper function.

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- When performing other underhood services, the hood

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be

Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product. cleaned and lubricated.

However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi-

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

other service facilities using recovery and recycling

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR௡

equipment.

Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the

lock cylinder.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-

cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as

MOPAR௡ Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure

quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt

or road film.

wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

removed. Particular attention should also be given to from a dry windshield.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495

Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the

windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions

are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-

sary.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this

will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the

liftgate glass.

1 — Wiper Arm

2 — Pivot Cap

NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully

upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper

blade off of the liftgate glass.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade

forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the

blade holder.

wiper blade until it snaps into place.

5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into

place.

Adding Washer Fluid

On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be

indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the

windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and

the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the

rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is

located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the

fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with

windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Blade Pivot Pin

3 — Wiper Arm

4 — Wiper Blade Holder

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497

clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. Exhaust System

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This system.

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

containers.

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

WARNING!

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the

exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-

cation or oil change. Replace as required.

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

•

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can

contact anything that can burn.

•

The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-

trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-

formance and cause serious damage to the engine.

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is impor-

tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper

catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

•

Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

Cooling System

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Coolant Checks

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill

flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly

face of the condenser.

dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at

maintenance intervals.

the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the

entire system for leaks.

Selection Of Coolant

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-

ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-

ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501

Adding Coolant

CAUTION!

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance

intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up

to 5 Years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace-

ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance

period, it is important that you use the same engine

coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze).

•

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than

the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze),

may result in engine damage and may decrease

corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in

an emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-

fied engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-

tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they

may not be compatible with the engine coolant

(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.

•

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

•

The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR௡

Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula

HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or

equivalent.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

•

Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant Cooling System Pressure Cap

(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(-37°C) are anticipated.

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery tank.

•

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

WARNING!

engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

•

The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the

cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the

engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the

cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes

pressure to build up in the cooling system. To

prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-

sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will

decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and

will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)

changes.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503

Coolant Level

WARNING! (Continued)

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is

adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal

operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges

indicated on the bottle.

•

Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it

to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child

or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up

any ground spills immediately.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for

engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-

gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Points To Remember

•

If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle

does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling

system should be pressure tested for leaks.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles

(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at

50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)

and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of

your engine, which contains aluminum components.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

•

Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

•

Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the

radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine

coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of

coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against

freezing.

•

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas

mileage, and increased emissions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505

Brake System

Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked

system components should be periodically inspected. when performing under the hood service, or immedi-

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system

maintenance intervals.

failure.

The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the

outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and

a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these

two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because

leakage may occur at the cap.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as

the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in

fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check

should be conducted.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that

has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the

master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.

Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture

from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.

This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard

or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake

failure. This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

•

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-

nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507

The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to

22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-

nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could

be damaged, causing partial or complete brake

failure. This could result in a collision.

CAUTION!

Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage

them and cause them to leak.

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

Rear Axle Fluid Level Check

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not

required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons

the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be

inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the

fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)

below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill

hole.

The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to

22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum

housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be

tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with

cast iron housings.

Front Axle Fluid Level Check

The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)

below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill

hole.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Adding Fluid

Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,

when the vehicle is in a level position.

CAUTION!

Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then

and cause them to leak.

Drain

First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-

mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to

25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

Selection of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer

to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

Transfer Case

When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could

damage them and cause them to leak.

Fluid Level Check

Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is

found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by Selection of Lubricant

removing the filler plug located on the back side of the Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer

transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-

of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509

Automatic Transmission

CAUTION!

Selection of Lubricant

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the

manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in

more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to

“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the

transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-

mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-

mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-

tained at the prescribed level using the recommended

fluid.

Special Additives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered

product and its performance may be impaired by supple-

mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-

tives to the transmission. The only exception to this

policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid

leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as

they may adversely affect seals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

•

Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-

facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-

ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque

converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid

other than that recommended by the manufacturer

will result in more frequent fluid and filter

changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-

ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does

not require adjustment under normal operating

conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,

visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe

damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-

thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the

fluid level accurately.

Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine

Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this

reason, the dipstick is omitted.

If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or

malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the

transmission fluid level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511

Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine

6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on

Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”

operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-

(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a

fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the

fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do

To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure

not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the

must be used:

oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to

1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the

temperature.

fluid level.

2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below

the operating temperature, the fluid level should be

between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick

with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-

3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake

pedal.

4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at

ending with the shift lever in PARK.

room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”

(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches

180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the

normal operating temperature.

5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until

seated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F

(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add

fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to

produce an accurate reading.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission

after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the

dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the

dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated

position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the

dipstick tube.

The most common causes are:

•

Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

Stone and gravel impact.

Insects, tree sap and tar.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513

Washing

CAUTION!

•

Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

•

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of

paint and decals.

hicle in the shade using MOPAR௡ Car Wash or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

•

If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR௡ Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

Special Care

Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR௡

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to

protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the

paint.

•

If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

•

Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint

finish.

•

It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept

clear and open.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

•

If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

considered the responsibility of the owner.

chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a

mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

heavy soil, use MOPAR௡ Wheel Cleaner or select a

nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring

pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only

MOPAR௡ cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do

not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that

•

If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

•

If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage

de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well the wheels’ protective finish.

packaged and sealed.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –

•

If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider If Equipped

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

Use MOPAR௡ Touch Up Paint or equivalent on

scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized

dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your

vehicle.

•

Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

•

Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515

•

For tough stains, apply MOPAR௡ Total Clean or a mild Leather Seat Care And Cleaning

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-

stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. mended for leather upholstery.

For grease stains, apply MOPAR௡ Multi-Purpose Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

soap residue.

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be

taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any

liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,

solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean

your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-

tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

•

Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric

upholstery and carpeting.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp

cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equiva-

lent, then MOPAR௡ Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,

if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or

Armor All௡. Use MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent to

clean vinyl upholstery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Glass Surfaces

WARNING!

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR௡ Glass Cleaner or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows

equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be

used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp

rag.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

component may be stamped on the inside cover, other-

wise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the

inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR௡ Total Clean, a

mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove

the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft

cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

FUSES

Totally Integrated Power Module

Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)

The totally integrated power module (TIPM) is located in

the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge

fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

J01

J02

J03

J04

J05

J06

J07

J08

40 Amp

Green

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

25 Amp

Natural

25 Amp

Natural

40 Amp

Green

30 Amp

Pink

40 Amp

Green

Air Suspension

J09

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

J15

J17

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

60 Amp

Yellow

20 Amp

Blue

40 Amp

Green

40 Amp

Green

E-Brake

Power Liftgate Module

Trailer Tow

Headlamp Wash Relay

Contact

Drive Train Control

Module

Driver Door Node

Passenger Door Node

Rear Defroster

Main Ignition Off Draw

(IOD)

Trailer Tow Lamps/Park

Lamps

Antilock Brakes Pump/

Stability Control System

Antilock Brakes Valve/

Stability Control System

Front Cabin Fan/Blower

Power Seat

Starter Motor Solenoid

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

J18

20 Amp

Blue

Powertrain Control

Module/Powertrain

Control Module Trans-

mission Range

Radiator Fan Motor HI/

Radiator Fan Motor

Low

20 Amp Electronic Limit Slip

Yellow

Differential/Air Suspen-

sion

20 Amp Liftgate/Headrest

Yellow

25 Amp 115V AC Power Inverter

Natural

20 Amp Cigar Lighter

Yellow

J19

60 Amp

Yellow

J20

J21

J22

30 Amp

Pink

20 Amp

Blue

25 Amp

Natural

Front Wiper

Front/Rear Washer Con-

trol

Sunroof Module

20 Amp Power Outlet #2 (Swit-

Yellow

chable)

20 Amp Front Heated Seat &

Yellow Steering Wheel

20 Amp Rear Heated Seats

Yellow

15 Amp Stop Lamps

Blue

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

M10

M11

15 Amp Video/Universal Garage

Blue Door Opener

10 Amp Heating, Ventilation &

Air Conditioning (Cli-

mate Control System)

30 Amp Radio/Amplifier

Green

20 Amp Instrument Cluster

Yellow

20 Amp Back Up Camera

Yellow

M15

20 Amp Power Seat Module(s)/

Yellow

Adaptive Cruise

Control/Audio

Telematics/Daytime

Running Lights Relay/

Air Suspension

Module/Instrument

Cluster

Red

M12

M13

M14

M16

M19

M20

M21

10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con-

Red troller

25 Amp Automatic Shutdown 1

Natural and 2

15 Amp Instrument Cluster

Blue

20 Amp Automatic Shutdown 3

Yellow

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

M22

M23

M24

M25

10 Amp Horns (Low/High) –

Red Right

10 Amp Horns (Low/High) –

Red Left

25 Amp Rear Wiper

Natural

M29

M30

M31

M32

M33

M34

10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor

Red

15 Amp J1962 Diag Connector

Blue

20 Amp Backup Lamps

Yellow

20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor

10 Amp Occupant Restraint

Yellow

Output/Diesel Lift

Pump (Export Only)

Red

Controller

10 Amp Powertrain Controller/

Red Transmission Controller

10 Amp Park Assist Module/

M26

M27

10 Amp Driver Door Switch

Red Bank

10 Amp Ignition Switch/Wireless

Red

Climate Control System

Module/Infra Red

Sensor/Compass

Module

Red

Control Module/Keyless

Entry Module

M28

15 Amp Powertrain Controller/

Blue Transmission Controller

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity

Car-

tridge

Fuse

Mini

Fuse

Description

CAUTION!

•

When installing the totally integrated power mod-

ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is

properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to

do so may allow water to get into the totally

integrated power module and possibly result in a

electrical system failure.

When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.

The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated

may result in a dangerous electrical system over-

load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it

indicates a problem in the circuit that must be

corrected.

M35

M36

M37

15 Amp Left Rear Parklamps

Blue

20 Amp Power Outlet

Yellow

10 Amp Antilock Brakes/

Red

Stability Control System

Module

M38

25 Amp All Door Lock &Unlock

Natural

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523

VEHICLE STORAGE

REPLACEMENT BULBS

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than

21 days you may want to take steps to protect your

battery. You may:

Interior Lights

Bulb Type

Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W

Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976

Rear Cargo Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2

Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377

Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103

Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

•

Remove fuse #27 in the Totally Integrated Power

Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).

•

Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

Exterior Lights

Bulb Type

Aux Aperature Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 7440 (W21W)

Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W

Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T20

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W

Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –

If Equipped

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the

headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb

yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to

an authorized dealer for service.

Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K

Headlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11

Headlamps (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005

Liftgate Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)

Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

WARNING!

A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of

High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the

headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious

electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-

erly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that

can be purchased from your authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized

dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis- Front Turn Signal

charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are

turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-

1. Open the hood.

ishes and becomes more white after approximately 2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-

10 seconds, as the system charges.

Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped

1. Open the hood.

clockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the

bulb.

CAUTION!

2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn

counterclockwise to remove from housing.

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the

bulb.

CAUTION!

Front Fog Lamps

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and

disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connec-

tor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze 4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with

them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of

front fog lamp housing.

the front fog lamp housing.

3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are

the housing.

engaged in the slots of the collar.

6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp

housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are

fully engaged.

CAUTION!

•

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If

the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,

clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Always use the correct bulb size and type for

replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may

overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket

or the lamp wiring.

7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp

connector.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps

1. Raise the liftgate.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to

disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.

4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from

lamp.

2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.

5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the

lamp assembly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the

lower trim from the liftgate.

3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.

4. Open the flipper glass.

5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.

6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.

7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.

8. Continue removing the trim.

Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps

10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter

clockwise.

9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.

11. Remove/replace bulb(s).

12. Reinstall the socket(s)

13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.

See your authorized dealer for replacement.

Rear License Lamp

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the

snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.

2. Pull bulb from socket.

3. Replace bulb.

4. Reinstall lens.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S.

Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

3.6L and 5.7L Engines

24 Gallons

91 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)

5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)

Cooling System *

6 Quarts

7 Quarts

5.6 Liters

6.6 Liters

3.6L Engine (MOPAR௡ Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5-Year/100,000 Mile

10.4 Quarts

15.4 Quarts

9.9 Liters

Formula or equivalent)

5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR௡ Engine Coolant/Antifreeze

14.6 Liters

5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Pack-

age

5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR௡ Engine Coolant/Antifreeze

5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package

16 Quarts

15.2 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant

MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-

brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine

Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of

Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for

correct SAE grade.

Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of

Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for

correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter

MOPAR௡ Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.031 in [0.79 mm])

LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])

87 Octane

Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine

Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine

Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine

87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

Component

Automatic Transmission

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent

licensed ATF+4௡ product.

Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine

Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine

Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent.

MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent

licensed ATF+4௡ product.

Axle Differential (Front-Rear)

MOPAR௡ Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-

GL5) or equivalent with friction modifier additive.

MOPAR௡ Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API-

GL5) or equivalent.

Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L Engine With

Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L Engine Without MOPAR௡ Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-

Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)

Brake Master Cylinder

GL5) or equivalent.

MOPAR௡ DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If

DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is

acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent.

MOPAR௡ Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-1165, such

as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.

MOPAR௡ Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic

Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4௡ product.

Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine

Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 535

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

manual must be done at the times or mileages specified

to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-

tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating

conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip

driving. Inspection and service should also be done

anytime a malfunction is suspected.

is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced

NOTE:

•

The oil change indicator message will not monitor the

time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil

if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even

if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-

nated.

•

Change your engine oil more often if you drive your

vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals

exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever

comes first.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,

indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change

indicator message will illuminate, this means that service

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

•

Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, power steering and transmission

(5.7L only) and add as needed.

Check all lights and other electrical items for correct

operation.

At Each Stop for Fuel

•

Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change

fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level

while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the

accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when

the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

•

Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

•

Check the windshield washer solvent and add if

required.

Failure to perform the required maintenance items

may result in damage to the vehicle.

Once a Month

•

Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following

pages for the required maintenance intervals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

8,000 miles (13 000 km).

16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

16,000 miles (26 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or

12 months.

❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or

12 months.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537

24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or

18 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

24,000 miles (39 000 km).

32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

32,000 miles (52 000 km).

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,

change if using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer

towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or

30 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

40,000 miles (65 000 km).

48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

48,000 miles (78 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,

off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539

56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or

42 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

56,000 miles (91 000 km).

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;

replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541

72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or

54 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

72,000 miles (117 000 km).

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

80,000 miles (130 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104,000 miles (169 000 km).

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,

change if using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer

towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or

66 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

88,000 miles (143 000 km).

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543

96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).

❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).

❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;

replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or

78 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

104,000 miles (169 000 km).

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if

not done at 60 months.

112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

112,000 miles (182 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545

120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

120,000 miles (195 000 km).

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,

off-road or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

128,000 miles (208 000 km).

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).

136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or

102 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

136,000 miles (221 000 km).

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Change the transfer case fluid.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547

144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before

144,000 miles (234 000 km).

❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or

114 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of

irregular wear, even if it occurs before

152,000 miles (247 000 km).

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,

off-road or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer

to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions

warranty.

WARNING!

•

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform

a service job, take your vehicle to a competent

mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your

vehicle could result in a component malfunction

and effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 551

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Ⅵ Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Ⅵ MOPAR௡ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 552

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 552

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004

solved with this process.

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426–5337

•

If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465–2001

If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the

concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

•

Owner’s name and address

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

Authorized dealership name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the 485-2001).

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

a Bell Relay Service operator.

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their

MOPARா PARTS

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

MOPAR௡ fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-

cals known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

dealer, and the manufacturer.

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–

9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

556 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

•

Service Manuals

•

Owner’s Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the

information that students and professional technicians

need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group

LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the

vehicle, system, and/or components is written in

straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,

and charts.

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to

acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-

hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency

and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,

capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•

1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

•

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-

grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-

cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians

to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-

hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to

find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-

step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,

proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools

and equipment.

1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

requirements in addition to these grades.

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades

WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

560 INDEX

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 164 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,252

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 490 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,324 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 21

Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,75 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74,79,95,244 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 324

Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,509

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,72,74,75

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 68,72,75

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 561

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510,511

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 219 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 92

Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523,524

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Caps, Filler

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,426

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

562 INDEX

Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,295

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,320 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Connector

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Check Engine Light

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 309

(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,81,86,88 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,86

Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 563

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Dipsticks

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Disposal

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 500,530

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 269

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,322,329 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 316

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

564 INDEX

E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 484

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Engine

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 219

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 161,164

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,254

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481,482

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 481,482

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94,426

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,530

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487,530

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 565

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488,530

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,246,525,527

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 76

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94,426

Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,428

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,497 Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 509,510,511

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

566 INDEX

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 531

Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,360

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,433,483

Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,433

Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 567

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Gauges

On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,28,185,421 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Hitches

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,437

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,436 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 HomeLink௡ (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 206

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,16

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

568 INDEX

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,81 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,273,340

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,244 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,273

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 154 LATCH

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 84,86

Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461,464 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 569

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,144

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74,79,95,244

Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 389

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524,525

Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 244

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,204

Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 244

Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

570 INDEX

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,144,525,527 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,86

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Mode

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 244,484 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485,554

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 571

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,72,76

Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488,530

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489,530

Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,72,75 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,484

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,460

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,555

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

572 INDEX

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Pretensioners

Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programming Transmitters

Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 396 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Power

Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,355

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 219 Radio, Satellite (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . 316

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,215 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 159 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 573

Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 454 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 456 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Remote Control

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 318 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

574 INDEX

Satellite Radio (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 54 Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,252

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,88 Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Service Engine Soon Light

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,295

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 575

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,246,525,527 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Sirius Backseat TV™ (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . 316 Steering

SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159

Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,405,462 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Specifications Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 161,164 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,523

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,339 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,215

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,344 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

576 INDEX

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 63 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,400,557

Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,397

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 324

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159

Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 396

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 577

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Transmission

Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,473

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,509

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Transmitter Battery Service

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) . . 206

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Transmitter Programming

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 23

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525,527

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

578 INDEX

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 309 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,496

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397,433 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,214,218

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,523 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Video Entertainment System™

(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 579

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,322 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chrysler Group LLC

10WK741-126-AD

Printed in U.S.A.

Fourth Edition

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bissell Vacuum Cleaner 4104 User Manual
Black Decker Pressure Washer 598111 01 User Manual
Blue Rhino Charcoal Grill NB1854 User Manual
Boston Acoustics Car Speaker SX85 User Manual
Bowflex Home Gym RevolutionXP User Manual
Casio Digital Camera EX S20U EX M20U User Manual
Cecilware Coffeemaker ICAP1 User Manual
Chicago Electric Chainsaw 68316 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Indoor Furnishings LCD2TS User Manual
Chromalox Electric Heater POO401 9 User Manual